Essentials, Volume 1

Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC)

Autodesk ®

Inventor ®

2009

527A1-050000-CM10A
April 2008
 © 2008 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in
any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder.

Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/
logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio,
Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator,
AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent,
Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch,
AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream,
Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware,
Content Explorer, Create>what’s>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer’s
Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Design
Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV,
Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax,
Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara
(design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX,
ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology,
Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit,
Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge,
Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual
Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral.
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other
countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and
Wire.
All other brand names, product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. “AS IS.”
AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 Mclnnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
Contents

Volume 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Chapter 1: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
About Multiple Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
About Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Inventor File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Menus and Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Context-Sensitive Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Exercise: Explore the Autodesk Inventor User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Lesson: View Manipulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
About the Graphics Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Orbit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
About the ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using the ViewCube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Using Home View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Restoring Your Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Exercise: Manipulate Your Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
About Parametric Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Capturing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Creating Parametric Part Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Part Design Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Exercise: Create a Parametric Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

iii
 Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
About Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Point Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Reorienting the Initial Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Basic Sketching Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Guidelines for Successful Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Exercise: Create 2D Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Lesson: Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
About Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
About Constraint Inference and Persistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Applying Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Showing and Deleting Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Guidelines for Successful Constraining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Toggling Sketch Degrees of Freedom Glyph Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Exercise: Constrain Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
About Dimensional Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Creating Dimensional Constraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
About Dimension Display and Relationships. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Exercise: Dimension Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
About Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Specifying Operation and Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Orienting Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Exercise: Create Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Exercise: Create Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Lesson: Intermediate Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
About Sketch Linetypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating and Using Construction Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating and Using Reference Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Exercise: Create a Part Using Construction and
Reference Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

iv ■ Contents
 Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Editing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Using Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Exercise: Edit Parametric Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Exercise: Create Parameters and Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Lesson: 3D Grip Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
About 3D Grip Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Using the 3D Grips Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Exercise: Edit with 3D Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Lesson: Creating Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
About Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Creating Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Creating Work Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Creating Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Exercise: Create Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Exercise: Create Work Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Exercise: Create Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
About Swept Shapes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Creating Sweep Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Guidelines for Creating Swept Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Exercise: Create Sweep Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Chapter Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
About Chamfers and Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Creating Chamfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Guidelines for Creating Chamfers and Fillets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Exercise: Create Chamfers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Exercise: Create Fillets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
About Hole Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Creating Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Creating Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Exercise: Create Holes and Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Lesson: Patterning and Mirroring Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
About Feature Reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Lesson: Creating Rectangular Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Lesson: Creating Circular Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Lesson: Mirroring Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Exercise: Create Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Exercise: Mirror Part Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Contents ■ v
 Lesson: Creating Thin-Walled Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
About Thin-Walled Part Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Creating Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Exercise: Create and Edit Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Lesson: Designing Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
About Assembly Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Assembly Design Approaches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Using Existing Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Designing Components In-Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Assembly Design Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Recommended Assembly Design Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Exercise: Use the Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
About Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Project File Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Creating a Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Editing Project Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Recommendations for Project Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Exercise: Create a Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components . . . . . . 359

Lesson: Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
About Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Exercise: Place Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Lesson: Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
About Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
The Constraint Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Placing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Viewing and Editing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Proper Constraining Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Exercise: Constrain Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Lesson: Placing Standard Components Using the Content Center . . . . . . . 392
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
About the Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
About Content Center Consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Using the Content Center Consumer Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Using the Supplier Content Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Exercise: Use Content Center Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

vi ■ Contents
 Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
About Designing and Editing in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Capturing Design Intent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Creating Components in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Editing Components in Place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Guidelines for In-Place Component Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Exercise: Create Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Chapter Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

Volume 2

Chapter 7: Interacting with an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Lesson: Identifying Parts in an Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Selecting Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
About Isolating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About Browser Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
About Locating Components in the Browser and Graphics Window . . . 8
Creating Assembly Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Exercise: Identify Parts in an Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lesson: Analysis and Motion Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Calculating Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Checking for Interferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Driving Constraints for Simple Motion and Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Exercise: Calculate Properties and Analyze Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Exercise: Drive Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lesson: Presenting Your Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
About Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Creating Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Creating Tweaks and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
About Animating Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Animating Presentations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Exercise: Create an Exploded Presentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Exercise: Animate an Exploded Presentation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Chapter Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Chapter 8: Basic View Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Lesson: Drawing Creation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
About Creating Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Creating Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
About the Drawing Creation Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Using the Drawing Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Exercise: Use the Drawing Creation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Contents ■ vii
 Lesson: Base and Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Creating Base Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Creating Exploded Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Creating Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Properties of Editing Base and Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Exercise: Create and Edit Base and Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Lesson: Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Creating Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Editing Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Properties of Assembly Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Exercise: Create and Edit Section Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Lesson: Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
About Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Creating Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Moving and Editing Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Exercise: Create and Edit Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Exercise: Create and Edit Detail View Edge Shapes
and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Lesson: Crop Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Supported View Types and Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Creating Quick Cropped Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Creating Cropped Views with Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Exercise: Create and Edit Cropped Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lesson: Managing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
About View Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
About Moving, Aligning, and Editing Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Moving, Aligning, and Editing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
About Line Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Controlling Line Visibility in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Exercise: Manage Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Chapter 9: Dimensions, Annotations, and Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Lesson: Automated Dimensioning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
About Automatically Placed Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Retrieving Model Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Editing Model Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Exercise: Dimension a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

viii ■ Contents
 Lesson: Manual Dimensioning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
About General, Baseline, and Ordinate Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Creating General Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating Baseline Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Creating Ordinate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Exercise: Create General Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Exercise: Create Baseline Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Exercise: Create Ordinate Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Lesson: Annotating Holes and Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
About Hole and Thread Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Working with Hole and Thread Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Creating Linear Dimension Thread Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
About Hole Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Working with Hole Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Exercise: Create and Edit Hole Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Exercise: Create and Edit Hole Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Lesson: Creating Centerlines, Symbols, and Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
About Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Creating Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
About Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Documenting Views with Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
About Leaders and Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Adding Leaders and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Editing Leaders and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Exercise: Add Centerlines, Center Marks, and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Lesson: Revision Tables and Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
About Revision Tables and Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Process of Working with Revision Tables and Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Revision Table Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Adding a Revision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
About Editing Revision Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Adding and Editing Revision Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Exercise: Configure, Add, and Edit Revision Tables and Tags. . . . . . . . 244
Chapter Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Chapter 10: Annotating Assembly Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Lesson: Assembly-centric Bill of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
About the Bill of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Using the Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Item Number Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Exercise: Edit an Assembly Bill of Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Lesson: Creating and Customizing Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
About Parts Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Creating Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Editing Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Exercise: Create and Customize a Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Contents ■ ix
 Lesson: Creating Balloons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
About Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Placing Balloons Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Placing Balloons Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Editing Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Exercise: Create Balloons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Chapter 11: Drawing Standards and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Lesson: Setting Drawing Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
About Styles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Creating Styles with the Style Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
About Drawing Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Properties of Drawing Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Defining the Active Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Using Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Exercise: Set Drawing Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Lesson: Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
About Drawing Sheets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Creating Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
About Custom Borders and Title Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Creating Custom Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating Custom Title Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Exercise: Use Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Exercise: Customize a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Appendix A: Additional Support and Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Courseware from Autodesk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Autodesk Services & Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Autodesk Subscription. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Autodesk Consulting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Autodesk Partners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Autodesk Authorized Training Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Autodesk Student Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Autodesk Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Autodesk Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Useful Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

x ■ Contents
 Acknowledgements

The Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) team wishes to thank everyone who
participated in the development of this project, with special acknowledgement to the
authoring contributions and subject matter expertise of Ron Myers and CrWare, LP.
CrWare, LP began publishing courseware for Autodesk Inventor in 2001. Since that time,
the company has grown to include full-time curriculum developers, subject matter experts,
and technical writers, each with a unique set of industry experiences and talents that
enables CrWare to create content that is both accurate and relevant to meeting the
learning needs of its readers and customers.
The company’s Founder and General Partner, Ron Myers, has been using Autodesk
products since 1989. During that time, Ron Myers worked in all disciplines of drafting and
design, until 1996 when he began a career as an Applications Engineer, Instructor, and
Author. Ron Myers has been creating courseware and other training material for Autodesk
since 1996 and has written and created training material for AutoCAD, Autodesk Inventor,
AutoCAD Mechanical, Mechanical Desktop, and Autodesk Impression.

Acknowledgements ■ xi
xii ■ Acknowledgements
Introduction
Welcome to the Autodesk Inventor 2009 Essentials Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC), a
training course for use in Authorized Training Center (ATC®) locations, corporate training settings, and
other classroom settings.
Although this courseware is designed for instructor-led courses, you can also use it for self-paced
learning. The courseware encourages self-learning through the use of the Autodesk® Inventor® 2009
Help system.
This introduction covers the following topics:
■ Course objectives
■
Prerequisites
■
Using this courseware
■ CD contents
■
Completing the exercises
■
Installing the exercise data files from the CD
■ Projects
■
Notes, tips, and warnings
■
Using this courseware to prepare for Certification exams
■
Feedback

This courseware is complementary to the software documentation. For detailed explanations of

features and functionality, refer to the Help system in the software.

Course Objectives
After completing this course, you will be able to:
■ Capture design intent using the proper techniques and recommended workflows for creating
intelligent 3D parametric parts.
■
Create, place, and constrain custom and standard components in an assembly, simulate
mechanisms, animate assembly designs, and check for interferences.
■
Document designs using base, projected, section, detail, and isometric drawing views, and
document assemblies using standard and exploded drawing views.
■ Follow drafting standards while dimensioning and annotating drawing views with centerlines,
symbols, leaders, hole and thread notes, hole tables, automated balloons, and parts lists.

xiii
 Prerequisites
This course is designed for new Autodesk Inventor users who want to learn the essential tools and
principles of 3D parametric part design, assembly design, and how to create production-ready part
and assembly drawings using Autodesk Inventor.
It is recommended that you have:
■
A basic understanding of mechanical drafting or design.
■
A working knowledge of Microsoft® Windows® 2000 or Microsoft® Windows® XP.

Using This Courseware

The lessons are independent of each other. However, it is recommended that you complete these
lessons in the order that they are presented unless you are familiar with the concepts and functionality
described in those lessons.
Each chapter contains:
■
Lessons – Usually two or more lessons in each chapter.
■
Exercises – Practical, real-world examples for you to practice using the functionality you have just
learned. Each exercise contains step-by-step procedures and graphics to help you complete the
exercise successfully.

CD Contents
The CD attached to the back cover of this book contains all the data and drawings you need to
complete the exercises in this course.

Completing the Exercises

You can complete the exercise in two ways: using the book or on screen.
■
Using the book – Follow the step-by-step exercises in the book.
■
On screen – Click the AOTC - Autodesk Inventor 2009 Essentials icon on your desktop, installed
from the CD, and follow the step-by-step exercises on screen. The onscreen exercises are the same
as those in the book. The onscreen version has the advantage that you can concentrate on the
screen without having to glance down at your book.

xiv ■ Introduction
After launching the onscreen exercises, you might need to alter the size of your application window
to align both windows.

Installing the Exercise Data Files from the CD

To install the data files for the exercises:

1. Insert the courseware CD.

2. When the setup wizard begins, follow the instructions on screen to install the data.
3. If the wizard does not start automatically, browse to the root directory of the CD and
double-click Setup.exe.

Unless you specify a different folder, the exercise files are installed in the following folder:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Autodesk Learning\Inventor 2009\Essentials
After you install the data from the CD, this folder contains all the files necessary to complete each
exercise in this course. You can also use the Autodesk Learning shortcut on your desktop to quickly
access the datasets for each AOTC course on your system.

Introduction ■ xv
 Projects
Most engineers work on several projects at a time, and each project might consist of a number of files.
You can use Autodesk Inventor projects to organize related files and maintain links between files. This
courseware has a project file that stores the paths to all the files related to the exercises. When you
open a file, Autodesk Inventor uses the paths in the current project file to locate other required files.
To work on a different project, you make a new project active in the Project Editor.
Follow the instructions below to locate the Inventor 2009 Essentials project file for this courseware and
make it active.

1. Start Autodesk Inventor.

2. Click File menu > Projects.
■
In the Projects dialog box, click Browse.
■ In the Choose project file dialog box, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\
Autodesk Learning\Inventor 2009\Essentials.
■
Select Inventor 2009 Essentials.ipj.
■ Click Open.
3. In the Projects dialog box, double-click Inventor 2009 Essentials to activate the project.
Click Done.
Note: The check mark designates the active project.

Notes, Tips, and Warnings

Throughout this courseware, notes, tips, and warnings are called out for special attention.

Notes contain guidelines, constraints, and other explanatory information.

Tips provide information to enhance your productivity.

Warnings provide information about actions that might result in the loss of data,
system failures, or other serious consequences.

xvi ■ Introduction
Using this Courseware to Prepare for Autodesk Certification Exams
This book supports preparation for Autodesk Certification Exams. If you are planning to become
Autodesk Certified on Autodesk Inventor 2009 this book can help you prepare. The learning objectives
of the lessons and exercises in this book map directly to the objectives and questions on the Autodesk
Certification Exams.
For more guidance on how to use this book to prepare for the exams, visit
www.autodesk.com/certification.

Feedback
We always welcome feedback on Autodesk Official Training Courseware. After completing this course,
if you have suggestions for improvements or if you want to report an error in the book or on the CD,
please send your comments to [email protected].

Introduction ■ xvii
xviii ■ Introduction
 Chapter

1
Getting Started Chapter1:

Autodesk® Inventor® has a context-sensitive user interface that provides you with the tools
relevant to the tasks being performed. A comprehensive online help and tutorial system provides
you with information to help you learn the application. This chapter introduces the tools and
interface options that you use on a constant basis.
This chapter also introduces fundamental parametric part design concepts that enable you to
capture design intent and build intelligence into your designs.

Objectives
After completing this chapter, you will be able to:
■
Identify the main user interface components that are common to all Autodesk Inventor
design environments, and describe how to access different tools.
■
View all aspects of your design by efficiently navigating around in 2D and 3D space.
■
Describe the characteristics and benefits of a parametric part model.

1
Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface

Overview
This lesson describes the application interface. You are introduced to the different file types (part,
assembly, presentation, and drawing) you work with as you create and document your designs, and
you examine the common user interface elements and view management tools in these
environments.
As with all computer applications, the User Interface (UI) is what you use to interact with the program.
While the Autodesk Inventor UI shares many common themes and elements with other Microsoft
Windows applications, it also has some unique elements and functionalities that may be new to you,
even as an experienced CAD user.
In the following illustration, the Autodesk Inventor User Interface is shown.

2 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

 Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe the multiple environments within Autodesk Inventor.
■
Describe what project files are used for.
■ Describe the types of files Autodesk Inventor creates and the kinds of information they store.
■
Identify the major components of the Autodesk Inventor user interface.
■
Identify the browser and panel bar in the assembly, part, presentation, and drawing environments.
■ Identify and access various types of online help and tutorial resources.
■
Explore the Autodesk Inventor user interface.

About Multiple Environments

In order to provide the greatest design flexibility and reuse, each part, assembly, and drawing is stored
in a separate file. Each part file is a stand-alone entity that can be used in different assembly files and
drawing files. When you make a change to the part, that change is evident in each assembly or
drawing into which it is referenced. Assembly files can be referenced into other assembly files, into
presentation files, and into drawing files.
The basic file references that exist in a typical 3D design are represented in the following illustration.

Assemby files – Reference part files and are referenced by drawing files.
Part files – Are referenced by assembly files and drawing files.
Drawing files – Reference assembly files and part files.

Using Template Files

Template files serve as the basis for all new files you create. By using the template files you control
default settings such as units, snap spacing, and default tolerances in your new file.
The application offers template files for each type of file. Template files are categorized into two main
groups: English for English units (inches and feet), and Metric for metric units (millimeters and meters).
The New File dialog box has three tabs: Default, English, and Metric. The Default tab presents
templates based on the default unit that you select during installation, while the English and Metric
tabs present template files in their respective units.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 3

 Part Modeling Environment
In the part modeling environment:
■
You create and edit 3D part models.
■
The interface adjusts automatically to present tools for your current task, for example, tools for
sketching or tools to create 3D features.

The following illustration shows the user interface in the part modeling environment.

4 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Assembly Modeling Environment
In the assembly modeling environment:
■
You build and edit 3D assembly models. The components displayed in the system are references
to external parts and subassemblies.
■ You use assembly specific tools to position and build relationships between components.
■
A common set of viewing tools is available.

The following illustration shows the user interface in the assembly modeling environment.

Presentation Environment
In the presentation environment:
■
You create exploded assembly views.
■ You can record an animation of an exploded view to help document your assembly.
■
The presentation file references an existing assembly.
■
A common set of viewing tools is available.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 5

 The following illustration shows the user interface in the presentation environment.

Drawing Environment
In the drawing environment:
■
You create 2D drawings of parts and assemblies.
■ A drawing file references one or more parts, assemblies, or presentation files. Changes to the part
or assembly model update the associated drawing views and annotations.

The following illustration shows the user interface in the drawing environment.

6 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

About Project Files
As you create designs in Autodesk Inventor, file dependencies are created between files of different
types. For example, when you create a 3D assembly, a file dependency between the assembly and its
part models are created. As your designs grow in complexity, these dependencies can become more
complicated. Autodesk Inventor utilizes project files to locate the required files as they are needed. As
a result, when you open that 3D assembly, by using the information contained in the Project file,
Autodesk Inventor can locate the 3D part files and display them properly.
In the context of an introduction to the Autodesk Inventor User Interface, all that is important to
realize is that you must have an active project before you create any files. This is why the Project File
is listed in the New File dialog box. Autodesk Inventor installs several sample project files, but the
Default project is initially active.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 7

Inventor File Types
To maximize performance, Autodesk Inventor uses different file types for each type of file. Assembly
files are stored in a different type of file than the parts that are used to create them. 2D drawing
information can be stored in either the IDW file type that is unique to Autodesk Inventor, or the DWG™
format that is native to AutoCAD® and is an accepted industry standard.
In the following illustration, the New File dialog box illustrates the different types of files you can
create with Autodesk Inventor.

Part Files

Part files (*.ipt) represent the foundation of all designs using Autodesk Inventor. You use the part
file to describe the individual parts that make up an assembly.

8 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Assembly Files

Assembly (*.iam) files consist of multiple part files assembled in a single file to represent your
assembly. You use assembly constraints to constrain all the parts to each other. The assembly file
contains references to all of its component files.

Presentation Files

You use presentation files (*.ipn) to create exploded views of the assembly. It is also possible to
animate the exploded views to simulate how the assembly should be put together or taken apart.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 9

 Drawing Files

You use drawing files (*.idw) to create the necessary 2D documentation of your design. Drawing
files include dimensions, annotations, and views required for manufacturing. When you use a drawing
file to create 2D views of an existing 3D model, the views are associative to the 3D model, and changes
in model geometry are reflected in the drawing automatically. You can also use drawing files to create
simple 2D drawings in much the same way that you use other 2D drawing programs.

Inventor drawing files can also be stored in the standard DWG format. If you use this format for
your 2D drawings, they can be opened and saved in AutoCAD. This is a very useful option for users
who must share their design data with others who use AutoCAD.

10 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Menus and Toolbars
All environments share a common layout for menus and a single toolbar across the top of the
application window. Each environment displays menu items and tools specific to that environment.
As you change tasks within a single environment, menus and the toolbar adjust to present the
appropriate tools.
The following illustration shows the major components of the Autodesk Inventor user interface.
Menus and toolbars are displayed at the top of the application window.

Menu Browser
Toolbar 3D Indicator
ViewCube Graphics window
Panel bar

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 11

 Menu Structure
Autodesk Inventor uses the standard menu structure common in all Microsoft Windows applications.
The menu structure is context-sensitive based on the environment and mode you are using.
As you are learning the application more thoroughly, you should take the time to familiarize yourself
with the different options displayed on the menu while working in different environments.
The following illustration shows the Insert menu in the assembly modeling environment.

The following illustration shows the Insert menu in the part modeling environment.

The following illustration shows the Insert menu in the drawing environment.

Toolbars
By default, a single Inventor Standard toolbar is displayed in all environments. When you change
between environments the toolbar updates to present valid tools for the environment. The toolbar
contains tools for file handling, settings, view manipulation, and model or document appearance.

12 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

 Standard Toolbar
A section of the Inventor Standard toolbar is displayed in the following illustration. It is organized into
groups based on functionality. This area of the toolbar displays tools for standard file and modeling
operations.

Standard file management tools

Undo and redo
Selection filters
Environment navigation
Update document

Context-Sensitive Tools
As you switch between environments or between tasks in a single environment, Autodesk Inventor
displays the appropriate tools and information for the current task. The panel bar automatically
presents tools for the current task, and the browser displays information on the active environment.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 13

 The panel bar is your primary interface for accessing the tools available while you design. The
context-sensitive design presents the relevant tools based on the current context of your
design session. For example, when you switch from assembly modeling to part modeling, the
panel bar switches automatically to display the correct tools for the context where you work.
The browser is one of the main interface components. It is context-sensitive with the
environment you use. For example, when you work on an assembly you use the browser to
present information specific to the assembly environment. While you use the part modeling
environment, the browser displays information that is relevant to part modeling.

Part Modeling Panel Bar

When you are in the part modeling environment, the Part Features panel bar is displayed while you
create and edit part models. You use these tools to create parametric features on the part.

2D Sketch Panel Bar

You use the 2D Sketch Panel in the modeling environment to create 2D parametric sketches,
dimensions, and constraints. You use the same set of tools on the Assembly Panel when creating a
sketch in the assembly environment.

14 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Part Modeling Browser
The browser displays all features you use to create the part. The features are listed in the order in which
they are created. The browser also displays the Origin folder at the top of the list which contains the
default X, Y, and Z planes, axes, and center point.

Assembly Modeling Environment

When you are in the assembly modeling environment, the browser displays all the parts you use in the
assembly. It also lists the Origin folder containing the default X, Y, and Z planes, axes, and center point
of the assembly.
If applied, nested under each part, you see the assembly constraints. If you select an assembly
constraint, an edit box is displayed at the bottom of the browser, enabling you to edit the offset or
angle value for the constraint.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 15

 In the assembly environment, you can use the Modeling View option in the Assembly View drop-
down list to display the part features nested under the parts instead of the assembly constraints.
This is useful when performing part modeling functions in the context of the assembly.

In the following illustration, the Assembly Panel is shown in the default Learning mode. The tool icons,
names, and keyboard shortcuts are displayed in Learning mode.

You can also access the Icon Only mode by right-clicking anywhere on the panel bar and clearing
the Display Text with Icons check box.

16 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Design Accelerator
Selecting Design Accelerator from the Assembly Panel drop-down list switches the panel bar to
display the Design Accelerator tools. You use the drop-down list below Design Accelerator to set the
standard that is used by the tool.

Presentation Panel
When you are in the presentation environment, you use the Presentation Panel to create presentation
views and tweaks, and to animate geometry in the presentation environment.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 17

 Presentation Browser
The browser displays the presentation views you create followed by the tweaks you use for the
explosion. When you expand each tweak, you see the parts included in that tweak. You can also switch
the browser mode from Tweak View to Sequence View or Assembly View.

Drawing Environment
In the drawing environment, the browser displays the Drawing Resources folder containing sheet
formats, borders, title blocks, and sketched symbols. It also displays each sheet in the drawing along
with the views you create for each.

18 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

You use the Drawing Views Panel in the drawing environment to create drawing views on the sheet.

You use the Drawing Annotation Panel in the drawing environment to add reference dimensions and
other annotation objects.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 19

 Keyboard Shortcuts
On the panel bar and menus, you can use keyboard shortcuts to access tools. For example, you can
enter P for Place Component, or N for Create Component. Entering the keyboard shortcut is the same
as clicking the tool on the panel bar or menu.

Access Shortcut Keys List

You can access a complete list of the default shortcut keys from the Help menu.
Click Help menu > Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference

Condensed Panel Bar

As you become more familiar with the tools in each environment, you can condense the panel bar by
clearing the check mark on the Display Text with Icons option. To switch, select the panel drop-down
menu next to the panel name and click Display Text with Icons. In this mode, tools are displayed with
icons only to allow more area for the browser and graphics windows.

20 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

 Alternative Panel Bar and Browser Positions
In addition to the default positions, you can alter the location of the panel bar or browser by clicking
and dragging the horizontal bars near the top of the element, or the title area when the element is
floating. Both the panel bar and browser can be placed in a docked position on the left or right side of
the screen, or in a floating position anywhere in the graphics window.

Online Help and Tutorials

Autodesk Inventor offers several types of online help, tutorial references, and other resources to assist
in building your skill level. Standard Help files, context-sensitive how-to presentations, Show Me
animations, and tutorials are available.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 21

 Setting Your User Type
The initial Help screen enables you to specify the user type that most closely matches your situation.
Topics that are most relevant to the user type selected are presented first on the initial help screen. By
default, the option to Show Help on startup is enabled. This causes the Inventor Help system to launch
each time you start Inventor and create a new file or open an existing file.
To access the Inventor Help System, press F1 or click Help menu > Help Topics.

Help for Returning and New Users

Returning and new users can find links to Help information that is most relevant for them.

22 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Help for AutoCAD Users
AutoCAD users can use the Help topics designed specifically for them as they make the transition to
Autodesk Inventor.

Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference

The Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference shows all of the default Shortcut/Alias keys along with the
command names they execute.
Click Help menu > Shortcut/Alias Quick Reference to access the reference.

Show Me Animations
The Show Me animations present topic-specific information in animated presentations.
To access the Show Me animations, click Help menu > Help Topics and select the Show Me link. In the
Show Me dialog box, navigate to the topic of choice and the animation begins automatically.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 23

 Tutorials
There are several tutorials available covering a range of topics from Introduction to Advanced. From
the main list of tutorials, select the topic of interest. The tutorials present step-by-step information on
performing tasks in Autodesk Inventor.
You access these tutorials by clicking Help menu > Learning Tools > Tutorials, or clicking Try It
Tutorials on the main Help screen.

24 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

In the following illustration, the Working with Tables page of the Parameters tutorial is displayed.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 25

Exercise: Explore the Autodesk Inventor User Interface
In this exercise, you explore the Autodesk Inventor ■
Navigate to the installation folder of your
user interface for assemby, part modeling, and
student dataset files. By default, this
drawing environments.
location is C:\Documents and Settings\
All Users\Autodesk Learning\
Inventor 2009\Essentials.
■
Double-click Inventor 2009 Essentials.ipj.
A check mark appears next to the active
project.
■
Click Done.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 1: Getting
Started. Click Exercise: Explore the 1. Open Mating Press View.iam.
Autodesk Inventor User Interface.
2. Because this is an assembly file, notice the
specific assembly modeling tools on the
Assembly Panel. In the browser, notice the
Exercise Setup appearance of both assemby files (1) and part
files (2). When assembly files are referenced in
Before you can complete the exercises for the
other assemblies, they are commonly
Autodesk Inventor 2009 Essentials course, you must
referred to as subassemblies.
activate the Inventor 2009 Essentials project file.

1. Start Autodesk Inventor. If Autodesk Inventor

is already running, close all files.
2. Click File menu > Projects.
■
If Inventor 2009 Essentials is displayed in
the project list, double-click to make it
active. A check mark appears next to the
active project.
■
If Inventor 2009 Essentials is not in the list,
click Browse.

26 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

3. In the browser, expand the Base_Plate:1
subassembly to view its referenced parts (1)
and assembly constraints (2).

5. To return to the assembly, on the Standard

toolbar, click Return.
Note: You could also double-click the
assembly in the browser.
6. To open a part in its own window:
■
In the browser, right-click the
Top_Component:1 part. Click Open.
4. To activate a part in the context of the The part opens in a separate window and
assembly: any changes made to the part are
■
In the browser, collapse the Base_Plate:1 reflected in the assembly.
■ Notice how the part color is different than
subassembly node.
■ Double-click the Top_Component:1 part it appears in the assembly. This occurs
instance. because a part can be assigned a different
■
color style in the context of the assembly.
Notice the change in appearance in the
browser, graphics window, and panel bar.
In the browser, the area listing non-active
components and subassemblies has a
grey background. The panel bar changes
to display tools specific to part modeling,
and in the graphics window, all non-
active components become transparent,
leaving only the part activated for editing
as opaque in color.

Lesson: Autodesk Inventor User Interface ■ 27

7. To activate the sketch environment: 11. In the browser, expand the Drawing
■
Resources node and View1: Mating Press
In the browser, expand the Extrusion1
View.iam node to reveal the nested resources,
part feature.
views, and assembly references.
■ Double-click Sketch1.

The browser background color changes to

indicate the active sketch, the part features
are rolled-back, and the graphics window
displays the sketch geometry.

12. To explore the Help System resources:

■
Press F1.
■
If you are an experienced AutoCAD user,
click the option for Users Transitioning
from AutoCAD and explore the Help
resources that are tailored for these users.
8. To exit the sketch, click Return on the ■ If you are new to Inventor and don't have
Standard toolbar. AutoCAD experience, click the option for
Returning / New Inventor Users and
9. Close the part file and return to the assembly.
explore the Help resources that are
If you prompted to save changes, click No.
tailored for these users.
10. To open an Inventor drawing file:
13. Close the Help windows.
■
Click File menu > Open.
14. Close all files in Inventor and do not save
■ In the Open dialog box select changes.
m_Mating-Press-Drawing.idw and click
Open.
■
The panel bar updates to show drawing
related tasks and tools.

28 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Lesson: View Manipulation

Overview
This lesson describes the use of the various view manipulation tools in the modeling and drawing
environments.
You view all aspects of your 3D geometry by navigating around in 3D space. The view manipulation
tools enable you to quickly perform these tasks in a manner that is intuitive and efficient.
In the following illustration, a constrained orbit is used to rotate the assembly and change the view
orientation. The ViewCube in the upper right corner, with the compass displayed, rotates with the
model and aids in orientation of the model.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■ Identify the tools that are available in the graphics window.
■
Explain the behavior of the Free and Constrained Orbit tools.
■
Explain the ViewCube options and how to access them.
■ Describe how the ViewCube can be used to view part and assembly models, and how to customize
its appearance and behavior options.
■
Explain the steps to define and restore the home view.
■ Describe how to use various tools to restore previous views.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 29

About the Graphics Window
Your 3D part and assembly models, presentations, and drawings are displayed in the graphics
window. Many tools are available to manipulate the view and appearance of your model in the
graphics window.

Viewing Tools
View manipulation is a key 2D drawing and 3D modeling skill. You are often required to view different
areas of a design, and changing your view can help you visualize solutions for the current task. Many
of the view manipulation tools are common to all environments.
The following illustration shows the view manipulation tools on the Inventor Standard toolbar.

Zoom all Orbit: Free Orbit and Constrained Orbit

Zoom window Look At: Reorients the view normal to the current selection

Dynamic zoom ViewCube: Toggles the ViewCube on or off

Pan SteeringWheels: Toggles the SteeringWheels on or off

Zoom to selection

30 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

You have different view manipulation tools available to you depending on how you want to change
where you are viewing and to what magnification. To efficiently change your view to see exactly what
you want or need to see, you need to know what view manipulation tools are available to you and how
to use them.

Icon View Tool Description

Free Orbit Enables you to freely rotate the view of your model on screen.

Constrained Constrained Orbit enables you to rotate around the vertical axis
Orbit of a model in a manner similar to the rotation of a turntable.

ViewCube In the 3D environment the ViewCube tool displays as a default in

the graphics window, enabling you to reorient your view of the
model. In the 2D environment the ViewCube enables the
definition of view orientations for a drawing view.
SteeringWheels The SteeringWheels tool is designed to be a common tool for
multiple Autodesk® products. The SteeringWheels tool was
implemented to provide many different levels and types of
control over model and drawing navigation.

You can use the mouse to accomplish most pan and zoom tasks.
■
Roll the mouse wheel to zoom at the cursor location.
■ Click and drag the mouse wheel to pan.
■
Double-click the mouse wheel to zoom all.

Display Modes
This area of the toolbar displays appearance-related tools for controlling the appearance of your
model. Select a render style from the list to change the color and texture of your model.

Toggle between Shaded, Shaded with Hidden Edge, and Wireframe display modes.
Toggle between Parallel and Perspective display modes.
Toggle between No Ground Shadow, Ground Shadow, and X-Ray Ground Shadow display
modes.
In an assembly file, toggle between Component Opacity On and Component Opacity Off
display modes.
Select a color/material to assign to a component.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 31

 3D Indicator
While using the assembly, part modeling, and presentation environments, the 3D Indicator is
displayed in the lower-left area of the graphics window. The Indicator displays your current view
orientation in relation to the X, Y, and Z axes of the coordinate system.

The 3D Indicator is positioned below and to the left of the assembly in this illustration.
■ Red – X-axis
■
Green – Y-axis
■
Blue – Z-axis

Orbit Tools
You have two options to rotate the views of models and assemblies. The Free Orbit tool is used to
rotate the model freely in screen space, while the Constrained Orbit tool is used to rotate the model
about axes in model space.
In the following illustration, the functionality of the Constrained Orbit tool is compared to that of a
globe. As you rotate a globe about the north-south axis, the angle at which you view the globe does
not change. The Constrained Orbit tool is similar in behavior.

32 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Access

Free Orbit

Menu: View > Orbit

Note: Accessing Orbit from the View menu will activate the Orbit functionality current
on the Inventor Standard toolbar.
Toolbar: Inventor Standard

Access

Constrained Orbit

Menu: View > Orbit

Note: Accessing Orbit from the View menu will activate the Orbit functionality current
on the Inventor Standard toolbar.
Toolbar: Inventor Standard

Free Orbit
The Free Orbit tool enables you to dynamically change your view of the model. It is important to
remember that the model does not move, you change your viewing position with the Rotate tool.
The following illustration outlines the rotation modes available. The cursor provides feedback on the
rotation mode available. You click and drag to rotate the view and you can set the center of rotation
by clicking a location on the model.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 33

 Click and drag here to rotate the view about all axes.
Click and drag here to rotate the view about a vertical axis.
Click and drag here to rotate the view about a horizontal axis.
Click and drag here to rotate the view about an axis normal to the screen.
Position and click here to exit.

Axis Orbiting with Free Orbit

The illustrations below display the behavior of the Free Orbit tool. When the model view is orbited
using the horizontal cross hairs, the model rotates about an imaginary vertical axis based on the view.
The model does not stay in the same view orientation. When the view is orbited without the use of the
cross hairs, the rotation is about the center of the graphics area, or the center as assigned by the
SteeringWheels.
In the following example, using the Free Orbit enables you to view the top and bottom of the
assembly as it is orbited.

34 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

 Axis Orbiting with Constrained Orbit
The Constrained Orbit tool places the axis of rotation on the vertical axis of the part or assembly. This
functionality enables users to orbit around the vertical axis of their models as they would on a
turntable.
In the following illustrations, the Constrained Orbit tool is started. The orbit starts from the right
horizontal cross hair. As the assembly is orbited, you can see the sides of the assembly, but your view
orientation remains the same.

About the ViewCube

The ViewCube tool displays by default in the graphics window. The ViewCube enables you to be more
efficient because it is accessible at all times, and provides intuitive access to multiple view
orientations.
In the following illustration, the front view of the assembly is about to be restored using the ViewCube.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 35

 Definition of the ViewCube
The ViewCube is a view manipulation tool that enables you to efficiently and intuitively change the
viewing angle of your parts and assemblies. The ViewCube uses faces, edges, and corners as selection
options to define viewing angles.

ViewCube Example
In the following illustration, the view of the hydraulic gate assembly is changed from the current
isometric view (1) to an angle view between the top and front views (2). The new view orientation was
obtained by selecting the ViewCube edge (3) between the Top and Front panels on the ViewCube.

Using the ViewCube

You can access the ViewCube tools by selecting the face, edge, or corner of the ViewCube. Each face,
edge, and corner of the ViewCube represents a different view orientation that corresponds to the
model. The model rotates to the selected view orientation when the ViewCube is clicked.
In the following illustration, the ViewCube is used to reorient the view of the assembly.

36 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Command Access

ViewCube

Toolbar: Inventor Standard

Command Access

ViewCube Options

Menu: Right-click the ViewCube, click Options

Menu: Tools > Application Options > Display tab > ViewCube

Introduction to ViewCube Options

The ViewCube is displayed in the upper right corner of the graphics area of a new window by default.
However, there are many options associated with the ViewCube that enable you to control both its
appearance and behavior.

ViewCube Display Options

The following options control the display and appearance of the ViewCube.

Use to toggle the display of the ViewCube.

Use to place the ViewCube in a corner of the graphics area. Options include: Top Right, Bottom
Right, Top Left, and Bottom Left. The default location is Top Right.
Use to set the ViewCube size. Options include: Small, Normal, or Large. The default setting is
Normal.
Use to control the ViewCube opacity. When the cursor is near the ViewCube, the ViewCube is
fully opaque. When the cursor is away from the ViewCube, the opacity of ViewCube is reduced.
Options include: 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100%. The default setting is 50%.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 37

 ViewCube Behavior Options
The following options control the behavior of the ViewCube.

Use to have the ViewCube snap to a common view when dragging the ViewCube through
different view orientations.
When selecting a new view orientation using the ViewCube, use this option to fit the new view
to the screen.
When checked, this option will smoothly transition from the current view to the selected view.
Use to apply additional calculations for view orientation.
Use to set the default orientation of the ViewCube.
Use to display a compass with the ViewCube.

38 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Procedure: Using the ViewCube to View Models
The following steps describe using the ViewCube to change the view orientation of your models and
assemblies.

1. Select the panel on the ViewCube to change

the view orientation.

2. Select the arrow to rotate the view orientation.

3. Select a corner to change the view orientation

to an isometric view of the panel view. In this
example, the Front view is shown.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 39

 4. An isometric view based on the Front view is
displayed.

Procedure: Using the ViewCube to Orient Drawing Views

The following steps describe using the ViewCube to set the view orientation of your models and
assemblies for drawing views.

1. Start the Drawing View tool.

2. Select to change the view orientation.

40 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

3. Select the desired ViewCube face.

4. If necessary, rotate the model orientation.

5. Accept the changes and place the view.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 41

 Procedure: Resetting the Current View as Front
The following steps describe resetting the current view orientation to the Front view.

1. Select the panel on the ViewCube to change

the view orientation.

2. Right-click the ViewCube, click Set Current

View as Front.

3. The ViewCube updates the orientation of the

current view to Front.

42 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Using Home View
Using the Home View tool, you can manipulate your model to any orientation, then specify that view
as the home view. In addition to being able to quickly return to that view, the home view is also the
view that is shown each time you open the file.
In the following illustration, the view orientation of the assembly is about to be restored to the home
view by clicking the Home View glyph next to the ViewCube.

Command Access

Home View

The Home View glyph displays as you move your cursor to the ViewCube.

In all modeling environments, you can quickly return to the home view using either of the
following methods.
■
Right-click in the graphics window background. Click Home View.
■ Press the F6 function key.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 43

 Home View Options
The following options control the model display when using the Home View tool.

Use to define the direction of the view and the zoom magnification.
Use to define the direction of the view and automatically assign the zoom magnification as
view all.

Procedure: Setting the Home View

The following steps describe how to set any view orientation to the home view.

1. Use any view manipulation tools to orient the

model.

44 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

2. With the model in the desired orientation,
right-click anywhere in the ViewCube. Click
Set Current View as Home, and select Fixed
Distance or Fit to View.

3. With the model in a different orientation, click

the Home View glyph.

4. The view orientation returns to the specified

home view.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 45

Restoring Your Views
As you manipulate the views in the graphics window, there will be times when you need to return to
a previous view to reevaluate your design or to make additional edits. The Previous View tool, and the
Rewind option of the SteeringWheels view manipulation tool, enable you to restore previous views.
The Previous View tool enables you to return to the view previous to your current view, while the
Rewind tool enables you to return directly to one of the previously defined views.
In the following illustration, the Rewind tool displays a filmstrip of previously visited views. As you
move your mouse over the previews, the main view updates to reflect the view being selected on the
filmstrip.

Access

SteeringWheels

Toolbar: Inventor Standard

Shortcut: CTRL + W

Access

Previous View

Menu: View > Previous View

Context Menu: Right-click anywhere in the graphics window, click Previous View
Shortcut: F5

46 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Procedure: Restoring Views
The following steps describe the two main methods for restoring previous views.

1. To return to your previous view:

■
Press F5. Each time that you press F5, you
will return the view previous to your current
view.
2. To return directly to a previous view that was
active several views prior to your current view:
■ Press CTRL+W to activate the
SteeringWheels.
■
Click Rewind.
■ Drag the cursor through the slideshow
ribbon displayed. When the desired view is
reached, release the mouse button.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 47

Exercise: Manipulate Your Model Views
In this exercise, you use the ViewCube and Home
Your view is displayed as shown.
View tools to navigate through and restore different
view orientations.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the 3. To view the current top view, on the
steps in this book or in the onscreen ViewCube, click Top.
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 1: Getting
Started. Click Exercise: Manipulate Your
Model Views.

1. Open 3D Navigation.ipt.
2. To switch to an isometric view, click the top
left corner of the ViewCube.

48 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

4. To rotate the view: 6. To redefine the current view as the Front
■
view:
On the ViewCube, click and hold Top.
■
■
Drag the cursor toward the upper left Move the cursor to the ViewCube.
■
corner of the ViewCube until the model is Right-click the cube. Click Set Current
oriented as shown. View as Front.

7. To view the model in an isometric view, click

the upper left corner of the ViewCube.

5. To return the view orientation to the original

Home view:
■
Move the cursor to the ViewCube.
■
When the house image is displayed (1),
click the image. 8. To redefine the Home view to the current
view:
■ Right-click the ViewCube.
■
Click Set Current View as Home > Fixed
Distance.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 49

9. To edit the options of the ViewCube: 12. To constrain orbit the model:
■ ■
Right-click the ViewCube. Click Options. On the Inventor Standard toolbar, click
■
In the ViewCube Options dialog box, Constrained Orbit from the Orbit drop-
under Document settings, select the down list.
■
Show the Compass Below the ViewCube Click the right quadrant line and drag the
option. cursor to the left.
■ Click OK. ■ Right-click, click Done.

Notice the orbit pivots about the axis.

10. To orbit the model:

■
On the Inventor Standard toolbar,
click Orbit.
■ Click the right quadrant line and drag the
cursor to the left until you can see the
13. To turn off the display of the ViewCube:
bottom view of the computer housing.
■
■ Right-click and click Done. On the Inventor Standard toolbar, click
ViewCube to turn off its display.
■
Click the option again to turn the
ViewCube on.

11. On the ViewCube, click Home View.

14. To return to your previous view:
■ Press F5.
■
You previous view is restored.
■
Press F5 again to return the view previous
to the current view.

50 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

15. To rewind to a specific view:
■ Press CTRL+W to activate the
SteeringWheels.
■
Click Rewind and hold down the cursor.
■ Drag your cursor over the views filmstrip
and release the mouse button over the
specific view you want to restore.
■
Continue to use the Rewind tool to
restore other views.

16. Close the SteeringWheels tool.

17. Save and close all files.

Lesson: View Manipulation ■ 51

Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts

Overview
This lesson describes the characteristics of parametric part models and the overall process of their
creation.
A parametric part model is shown with dimensions displayed in the following illustration.

Familiarity with the basic characteristics of parametric models simplifies the process of learning and
applying the tools to create such models.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe the characteristics of a parametric part model.
■ Identify guidelines for capturing design intent.
■ State the general workflow for creating parametric part models.
■
State the characteristics of the panel bar and browser when in the part environment.
■
Create a basic parametric part.

52 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

About Parametric Part Models
You can create and edit 3D geometry efficiently with parametric part models, which are controlled
primarily by geometric and dimensional constraints.
A typical parametric part is shown in the following illustration, consisting of both 2D sketch geometry
with dimensional constraints, and the resulting 3D solid geometry.

Parametric Part Models

A parametric model is a 3D model that is controlled and driven by geometric relationships and
dimensional values. You typically create parametric models from a combination of 2D sketches and
3D features. With a parametric part model, you can change a value of a feature and the part model is
adjusted according to that value and any existing geometric constraints.

Sketched Features
Sketched features are features that add or remove material and are typically based on a 2D closed loop
sketch. The sketch can be composed of lines, circles, and arcs.
Sketched features are shown in the following illustrations. After the sketch is used by a feature, it is
considered consumed by the feature, and is displayed nested below that feature in the browser.

Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts ■ 53

 Placed Features
While sketched features start from a sketch, placed features have an internally defined shape for
adding or removing material. You need to determine only where and at what size the feature should
be created. Holes and fillets are two commonly used placed features.
Placed features are shown in the following illustration by the Fillet 1, Chamfer1, and Circular Pattern1
features.

54 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Base Features
The first feature you create is typically a sketched feature. This first feature is also referred to as the
base feature. All subsequent features add material to or remove material from the part model.
Extrusion1 represents the base feature of the part in the following illustration.

Base sketch and base feature

Progression of a Parametric Model

A parametric model progresses through the stages of its creation in the following illustrations. The
model is transformed after the size of the base feature is increased upon inclusion of sketched and
placed features.

Initial sketch is created Base feature is created

Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts ■ 55

 Secondary sketch is added Secondary feature is created
from secondary sketch

Fillets (placed features) are added Length is changed in initial sketch,

causing part to update

Capturing Design Intent

Regardless of the type of design you are creating, you should always aim to capture the intent of the
design as early in the process as possible. It is common for a design to change as a result of inherent
design problems or future revisions. The ability to capture design intent makes these potential
changes much easier to implement.
Design intent has been captured in the following illustration by using a simple formula (2) to calculate
the outside diameter of the part based on the inside diameter (1).

56 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

About Capturing Design Intent
When you capture your design intent, you add intelligence to your design. This intelligence can exist
in several different forms. It can reside in a simple geometric constraint that forces two lines to be
parallel, or two circles to be concentric. Intelligence can also reside in dimensional constraints that
force a feature's dimension to remain constant, or enable the dimension to change based on a built-
in formula.
Just as each part design is unique, so is the design intent for each part. Capturing this intent is a
process in which you match the design intent with a feature or capability that makes it possible to
create the design in the most efficient way, while allowing for the maximum flexibility in making
changes.
Different examples of design intent are shown in the following illustration being captured at the
earliest stage of the design. The toolbars show constraint symbols (glyphs).

Toolbars displaying geometric constraints applied to the geometry. Each icon illustrates a
specific type of geometric constraint that has been applied to the sketch, and as a result
captures a portion of the design intent. For example, the right-most icon on the top toolbar
indicates a tangent constraint between the top horizontal line and the arc on the right side of
the sketch.
Coincident constraints are displayed by a yellow dot at the coincident point between two
segments.
Dimensional constraints applied to the geometry. These types of constraints capture design
intent by defining the size of objects in the sketch.

Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts ■ 57

 Guidelines for Capturing Design Intent
Consider the following guidelines when you begin a new part design. Each of the following points
indicates an area in which design intent can be captured.
■
Identify geometric relationships. For example, a feature's length may be directly related to its
width, or the width or length of another feature.
■
Identify areas of the design that may be prone to change as a result of design problems or
revisions.
■ Identify areas of symmetry or areas where features are duplicated or patterned.

Once you have identified the potential ways to capture your design intent, you can then match that
intent with a specific Inventor tool or capability.

Example of a Part Design Capturing Design Intent

A simple parametric design of a plastic indexer is shown in the following illustrations. Each one reflects
how a specific guideline of the design intent is captured and implemented into the design with a
parametric feature.

Capturing Geometric Relationships in Design Intent

Design intent for the indexer part dictates that the outside diameter should be equal to twice the
inside diameter in the following illustration. The design intent has been captured with the use of a
simple formula in the dimension parameter.

Inside diameter of the indexer part.

Outside diameter is determined by a formula equal to twice the inside diameter.

58 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Capturing Design Intent for Features That Are Prone to Change
Design intent has been captured to allow for potential design changes in the following illustration. As
the thickness of the part changes, so does the depth of the slots. This result is achieved by setting the
depth parameter for the slot to All, ensuring the slot always extrudes completely through the part.

With a 3 mm part height, slot depth cuts though the entire part.
With a change in part height from 3 mm to 6 mm, the slot depth continues to cut through the
entire part.

Capturing Symmetry in Design Intent

Design intent for symmetry has been captured in the part design in the following illustration by using
a parametric pattern feature. By capturing the design intent in this manner, you can easily change the
number or angled spacing of slots by editing the feature.

Original slot feature.

Circular pattern being created to duplicate the slot feature in a precise and
easily editable manner.

Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts ■ 59

Creating Parametric Part Models
The overall process for creating parametric part models is very flexible. With this flexibility, you can
concentrate on your design, design intent, and essential design features instead of being limited by a
rigid modeling process.
In the following illustration, what begins as a simple circle is transformed into fully parametric model.

Process: Creating a Parametric Part

The following steps provide an overview of the process for creating a parametric part.

1. Create the initial sketch profile.

2. Capture the design intent by applying

constraints and dimensions.

3. Use the part feature tools to create the base

feature.

4. Continue to develop the design by creating

additional sketched and placed features.

60 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

 Part Design Considerations
When creating a parametric part model, try to determine the basic building blocks of the part; that is,
how the part can be designed and built in stages. Also determine which aspects of the model are the
critical aspects of the part. You create those aspects first in the order of their importance and
relationship.

Part Design Workflow

The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating parts.
■
Use one of the part templates provided to create a new part.
■ All new parts you create have a blank sketch automatically placed. Create the profile of your
geometry on the initial sketch.
■
Use sketched features such as Extrude and Revolve to create your base feature.
■ Create additional sketched and placed features as required to generate the necessary 3D
geometry.

Part Design Environment

When you are editing a part file and the part environment is active, the panel bar and browser are
displayed with the tools and information relevant to this environment.
The part design environment is shown in the following illustration.

Part Features panel bar – Displays part modeling tools, while in part modeling mode. When
you are sketching 2D geometry, the panel bar displays sketching tools.
Browser – Displays the feature history for the part or assembly.

Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts ■ 61

 Part Features Panel Bar
The Part Features panel bar is displayed when you are editing a part model. You use these tools to
create sketched and placed features on the part.

Browser
When you use the browser in the part design environment, it displays the Origin folder containing the
default X, Y, and Z planes, axes, and center point. It also lists all features you use to create the part.
Features are listed in the order in which they are created.
The part design environment is active when the entire background of the browser displays in white.

The tools and options available on the shortcut menu depend on the type of feature you right-click,
or whether you right-click in the open background of the browser.

62 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Exercise: Create a Parametric Part
In this exercise, you create a simple bracket by
extruding the predefined sketch. You then edit the 1. Open Create-Parametric-Part.ipt.
part by changing some of the parameters and add a The initial sketch profile has been created and
fillet feature. constrained.

The completed exercise 2. On the Part Features panel bar, click Extrude.
■
For Distance, enter 25 mm.
■
Completing the Exercise Click OK.
To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 1: Getting
Started. Click Exercise: Create a
Parametric Part.

Lesson: Designing Parametric Parts ■ 63

3. In the browser, expand the Extrusion feature. The parametric part updates to reflect the
■
new parameter value.
The initial sketch is consumed by the 3D
extrusion feature.

4. In the browser, double-click Sketch1.

■ Double-click the 25 mm horizontal
dimension.
■
In the Edit Dimension dialog box,
enter 35.
■
Press ENTER.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click Return.

The part is updated to reflect the new 6. On the Part Features panel bar, click Fillet.
dimension value. ■
Select the inside edge.
■
For Radius, enter 5 mm.
■ Click OK.

5. In the browser, right-click the Extrusion1

feature. Click Edit Feature.
■
For Distance, enter 40 mm.
■ Click OK.
7. Save and close all files.

64 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started

Chapter Summary

By using the context-sensitive user interface and the tools that are available, you can quickly create
basic parametric geometry. This chapter introduced you to the Autodesk Inventor user interface and
concepts supporting parametric part design and capturing design intent.
Having completed this chapter, you can:
■
Identify the main user interface components that are common to all Autodesk Inventor design
environments, and describe how to access different tools.
■ View all aspects of your design by efficiently navigating around in 2D and 3D space.
■
Describe the characteristics and benefits of a parametric part model.

Chapter Summary ■ 65
66 ■ Chapter 1: Getting Started
 Chapter

2
Basic Sketching Techniques Chapter2:

The majority of the features that you create on your parametric part models start with
constrained 2D sketches. Intelligent and predictable part designs require a thorough
understanding of how to create 2D sketches and how to capture design intent by applying
geometric and dimensional constraints.

Objectives
After completing this chapter, you will be able to:
■ Use sketch tools to create 2D sketch geometry.
■
Use geometric constraints to control sketch geometry.
■
Apply parametric dimensions to your sketch geometry.

67
Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches

Overview
This lesson describes how to create 2D sketch geometry using sketch tools.
A basic parametric part for which several sketches were used to create its features is shown in the
following illustration.

Nearly every parametric part begins with a 2D sketch, and every sketch you create defines a 2D plane
on which your sketch geometry is created. These sketches not only form the foundation of each part,
but are also used throughout the design process.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe the differences between standard 2D sketching and 2D parametric sketches.
■
Explain the options for aligning geometry in 2D sketches.
■ Reorient the initial sketch to a different plane.
■
Use sketch tools to create sketch geometry.
■
Describe guidelines for creating successful sketches.

68 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

About Sketching
The sketch environment is where all 2D sketching takes place. When you create a new 2D sketch or
edit an existing sketch, the sketch environment is activated.
The sketch environment is activated as the sketch is edited, as shown in the following illustration.

When the sketch environment is active, the 2D Sketch Panel is displayed.

When you activate the sketch environment, the grid lines and X-Y axes are displayed by default
in the graphics window.
The active sketch is highlighted in the browser while all other elements are dimmed.

Parametric Sketching
A parametric sketch forms the base of each parametric part you create in Autodesk® Inventor®. Unlike
2D sketches that you can create in AutoCAD® or another nonparametric 2D application, when you
create a sketch in Autodesk Inventor, you immediately begin to add intelligence to your part, and
capture design intent.

Constraints in Parametric Sketches

A parametric sketch consists of 2D geometry on which constraints are applied to control the size and
potential behavior of the 2D geometry. There are two different types of constraints, geometric
constraints and dimensional constraints. As you create geometry in Autodesk Inventor, some
geometric constraints are applied automatically.

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches ■ 69

 The symbols next to the geometry in the following illustrations are known as “glyphs” and represent
2D constraints. Glyphs are displayed while a sketch tool is active and you are sketching. The use of 2D
constraints is one way in which design intent is automatically captured as you are creating your sketch
geometry.

Indicates a parallel constraint being applied to the bottom horizontal line.

Indicates a parallel constraint with the top horizontal currently being drawn.
Indicates a tangent constraint between the arc and the horizontal line being drawn.

You must add dimensional constraints to each element of the sketch for which you need to specify a
dimension. Both types of constraints applied to sketch geometry are shown in the following
illustration.

70 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

 Geometric Constraints
Geometric constraints, which are applied to geometry, are represented by the symbols on the
following toolbar. Each type of constraint is represented with a unique symbol.

From left to right:

■
Perpendicular constraint that forces the line to remain perpendicular to the left-side
vertical line.
■ Tangent constraint, forcing the line to be tangent to the arc.
■ Parallel constraint indicating that the line must remain parallel to the lower horizontal line.
■ Horizontal constraint that forces the bottom line to be parallel the X-Axis of the sketch.
Dimensional Constraints
These dimensions control the size of the objects. The diameter dimension controls the size of
the circle, while the linear dimension controls the length of the horizontal line.

Parametric Sketches Versus Precise Sketches

Precise sketches created with AutoCAD have no parametric intelligence. A change in a dimension
does not force the geometry to update to reflect the new dimension value. Parametric sketches in
Inventor enable you to click and drag the geometry in directions allowed by the existing constraints
while all conditions controlled by the constraints are maintained. For example, if you drag the outer
arc to a different size, the horizontal lines remain tangent, horizontal, and one unit in length.

Example
The effect of 2D geometric constraints is shown in the following illustration, where an element of the
sketch is dragged to reshape the geometry.

Original position of line element being moved.

Centerline element used with symmetry constraints.
Cursor dragging line to a new location.
New location of the line as it is being moved. Notice the same movement on the opposite side
of the sketch.
Dimensional constraint positioning the edge of the part. A change in this dimension would be
reflected on both sides of the centerline.

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches ■ 71

 To achieve the same modifications in a nonparametric sketch, you would have to duplicate each edit
on both sides of the centerline.

Fully Constrained Sketch Geometry

When you apply constraints to a sketch, each constraint removes degrees of freedom from the
geometry. By removing degrees of freedom, you limit the direction or amount a given part of the
sketch can be moved or resized. When a sketch has all degrees of freedom removed, it is considered
to be fully constrained.
While it is not necessary to fully constrain a sketch before creating 3D features, it is recommended. A
fully constrained sketch is predictable in the manner in which it can change, and reduces the number
of errors as changes are made to the parametric part.

Identifying the Constraint Conditions

Inventor uses color differences and numerical feedback to identify fully constrained as opposed to
underconstrained geometry. Represented in the following illustration, the lighter colored geometry
requires either geometric or dimensional constraints to fully constrain the sketch. You can use these
colors to identify which elements still require constraints. At the bottom right of the interface, the
application indicates “four dimensions needed” to fully constrain the sketch geometry.
Once the sketch is fully constrained, the profile will be a single color.

Colors used to show constraint conditions vary depending on your color configuration for Inventor.
Color differences occurring while using the Presentation configuration (white background) are the
least noticeable.

As your sketch increases in complexity, the number of constraints or dimensions required to

fully constrain the sketch also increases.

72 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Point Alignment
When you are creating sketch geometry and you want to align to a point projected from existing
geometry, you have two different workflows you can follow depending on the current setting for
point alignment. To utilize and benefit from automatic point alignment, you need to understand what
point alignment is and where to toggle it on and off.
The following illustrations show different point alignments automatically occurring during the
creation of sketch geometry.

Point Alignment
The automatic alignment of points during sketch creation is an option that you can toggle on and off.
Point alignment during sketch geometry creation enables you to create your sketch geometry with
the alignment you require as you create it. You can have the endpoints of the sketch geometry align
to an extension, be perpendicular, or align to a virtual intersection of other sketch geometry. You
achieve these point alignment locations by the position of the cursor. You do not need to scrub the
cursor over the intended referencing geometry first.
The automatic point alignment option is set globally for the installation of Autodesk Inventor. You
toggle on and off point alignment by selecting or clearing the Point Alignment On check box on the
Sketch tab in the Application Options dialog box.

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches ■ 73

Reorienting the Initial Sketch
Each time you create a new part, the default configuration places a new sketch on the XY plane. In
some cases you may want to begin sketching on a different plane. You can either delete the initial
sketch and create a new one, or you can reorient the initial sketch including any geometry that might
have been drawn.
The initial sketch of concentric circles has been reoriented from the XY plane to the YZ plane in the
following illustration.

Procedure: Reorienting the Initial Sketch

The following steps describe how to reorient the initial sketch to a different plane.

1. If the sketch is active, exit the sketch environment.

2. In the browser, right-click the initial sketch and click Redefine.

74 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

3. In the browser, expand the Origin node and select a plane to reorient the sketch.

4. The sketch and any existing geometry are reoriented to the selected plane.

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches ■ 75

Basic Sketching Tools
A profile or path sketch can consist of point, line, arc, circle, and dimensional geometry. When the
environment of a sketch plane is active, the panel bar switches to display the available sketch tools.
The 2D Sketch Panel contains all the tools for creating, manipulating, and controlling sketch
geometry.

Sketch Tool
By default, the first sketch in a new part is automatically created on the XY plane. If you require
additional sketches, you use the Sketch tool to create them manually or to activate existing ones. The
Sketch tool prompts you to select a plane to create a sketch, or to select an existing sketch to edit. You
can select planes or sketches in the graphics window or in the browser. You can create a new sketch
on a part face, origin plane, or work plane.

Access

Sketch

Toolbar: Standard
Shortcut Menu: Right-click a selected face or plane

76 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Exiting a Sketch
To exit the sketch, use one of the following methods:
■
On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click the Return button.
■ Right-click in the drawing area and click Finish Sketch.

Procedure: Creating Lines

The following steps describe how to create lines in your sketch.

1. On the panel bar, click the Line tool. Select a start point for the line segment.
2. Drag in the direction you want to draw the line. Notice that the constraint glyph (1) is
displayed. This glyph indicates the type of constraint being applied to the line segments.

Select a point to end the line segment.

3. Drag in the direction of the next line segment, again noticing the constraint glyph indicating
the automatic constraint.

Select a point to end the line segment.

4. Continue drawing line segments as required.
If the constraint glyph represents a constraint that you would like to change, brush the cursor
against the geometry on the sketch for which you want to apply the constraint, and then
continue drawing the line segment.

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches ■ 77

 5. Continue drawing line segments as required.

6. Right-click in the graphics window. Click Done.

Procedure: Creating Circles

The following steps describe how to create circles in your sketch.

1. To create a center point circle, on the panel bar click the Center Point Circle tool. Select the
center point of the circle.

2. Drag to a location representing the outside perimeter of the circle. Select that point to create
the circle.

3. Right-click in the graphics window. Click Done.

4. To create a three-point tangent circle, on the panel bar, click the Tangent Circle tool on the
Center point circle flyout.
5. Select three parts of the geometry for the circle to be tangent to.

6. Right-click in the graphics window. Click Done.

78 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Procedure: Creating Perpendicular or Tangent Arcs
The following steps describe how to create a perpendicular or tangent arc in your sketch using the
Line tool.

1. On the panel bar, click the Line tool.

2. Click+drag the endpoint of an existing line or arc. Temporary tangent and perpendicular
construction lines are displayed at the arc start point.
■
To create a perpendicular arc, click+drag in the direction of the perpendicular construction
line.

■ To create a tangent arc, click+drag in the direction of the tangent construction line.

3. Continue to drag the endpoint to the final endpoint of the arc and release.

4. Right-click in the graphics window. Click Done.

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches ■ 79

 Procedure: Creating Three-Point Arcs
The following steps describe how to create three-point arcs in your sketch.

1. On the panel bar, click the Three-Point Arc tool. Select the start point of the arc.

2. Select a point for the endpoint of the arc.

3. Drag to size the arc. Depending on existing geometry and arc size, constraint glyphs may be
displayed.

4. Right-click in the graphics window. Click Done.

Procedure: Creating a Two-Point Rectangle

The following steps describe how to create a two-point rectangle in your sketch.

1. On the panel bar, click the Two-Point Rectangle tool.

2. Select a point representing the first corner of the rectangle.
3. Select a point representing the opposite corner of the rectangle.

4. Right-click in the graphics window. Click Done.

80 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Guidelines for Successful Sketches
You can use several methods to create closed shapes. You can use tools such as the rectangle, circle,
or polygon, or you can constrain sketch geometry so that separate sketch elements come together to
create a closed shape. At times you may need to create sketch geometry that is not closed, for
example, a path for a sweep feature or to create a surface; however, these guidelines focus on creating
closed profiles.

Sketch Guidelines
Follow these guidelines for successful sketching:
■
Keep the sketch simple. Do not fillet the corners of a sketch if you can apply a fillet to the edges of
the finished 3D feature and achieve the same effect. Complex sketch geometry can be difficult to
manage as designs evolve.
■
Repeat simple shapes to build more complex shapes.
■ Draw the profile sketch roughly to size and shape.
■
Use 2D constraints to stabilize sketch shape before setting size.
■
Use closed loops for profiles.

Example of Sketching Guidelines

In the following illustration, the same part results from two different sketches. In the image on the left,
the sketch contains no fillets. The fillet features are created on the 3D part as placed features.
In the image on the right, the fillet features were placed at the sketch level. While this results in the
same part shape, this method complicates the sketch geometry.

Correct: Sketch with no fillets Incorrect: Sketch with fillets

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches ■ 81

Exercise: Create 2D Sketches
In this exercise, you create a simple Support Bracket
Note: The line length is displayed as it is
extrusion using the basic sketching tools.
drawn in the lower-right corner of the
application window.

The completed exercise

3. With the Line tool still active, create an inline
arc segment.
■
Completing the Exercise Drag the endpoint of the line segment to
the right to define the direction of
To complete the exercise, follow the
tangency for the arc.
steps in this book or in the onscreen
■
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters Release the left mouse button when the
and exercises, click Chapter 2: Basic endpoint of the arc is directly above the
Sketching Techniques. Click Exercise: start point. Use the grid spacing in the
Create 2D Sketches. following illustration to define the size of
the arc.

1. Create a new part using the Standard (mm).ipt

template.
■ Click File menu > New.
■
In the New File dialog box, click the
Metric tab.
■ Select Standard (mm).ipt.
■
Click OK.
2. Create a basic shape.
■
On the panel bar, click the Line tool.
■ Select a point near the origin.
■
Drag the cursor to the right, making
certain the horizontal constraint glyph
appears near the cursor.
■
Select the second point of the line
approximately 25 mm from the start
point.

82 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

4. With the Line tool still active, draw another 8. Extrude the shape 5 mm.
line segment to the left. ■ On the panel bar, click Extrude.
■
Move the cursor to the left until it is ■
In the Extrude dialog box, for distance,
positioned vertically above the start enter 5 mm.
point of and parallel to the first line ■ Click OK.
segment. Ensure that the constraint
glyphs are displayed as shown in the
following illustration.
■ Click to create the line segment.

5. Complete the sketch by creating the last line

segment as shown.

9. To create a new sketch on the front face of the

part:
■ Right-click the front face of the part.
■
Click New Sketch.

6. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit

the sketch.
7. On the ViewCube, click the top-right corner
to view the sketch in an isometric view.

Lesson: Creating 2D Sketches ■ 83

10. Draw a rectangle on the top surface. 12. Extrude the new sketch a distance of 10 mm.
■ ■
On the panel bar, click Two-Point On the panel bar, click Extrude.
Rectangle. ■
Select a point inside the rectangle.
■ Select point 1 as shown. ■ In the Extrude dialog box, enter 10 mm.
■
Select point 2 as shown. ■
Click OK.
Note: When selecting the points for the
rectangle, make sure the coincident
constraint glyphs appear.

13. Save and close the file.

11. On the Standard toolbar, click Return.

84 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Lesson: Geometric Constraints

Overview
This lesson describes geometric constraints and how to apply them to sketch geometry. You use
geometric constraints to control sketch geometry. For example, a vertical constraint applied to a line
segment forces that line segment to be vertical. A tangent constraint added to an arc forces that arc
to remain tangent to the geometry that has been constrained.
2D constraints on a part sketch are shown in the following illustration.

Geometric constraints represent the foundation of all parametric design. Using these objects, you can
capture your design intent and force the geometry to follow the rules set by each constraint.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe geometric constraints and their effects on geometry.
■ Explain how constraint inference and persistence provide complete control over when, where,
and which constraints are created in a sketch.
■
Apply geometric constraints to sketch geometry.
■ View and delete constraints using the Show Constraints tool.
■
State key guidelines for successful constraining.
■
Explain how to display sketch degrees of freedom and how they can assist in creating fully
constrained sketches.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 85

About Geometric Constraints
Several different types of constraints exist, each with a specific capability and purpose. The selection
you choose depends largely on the design intent.
As you create sketches, some constraints are inferred (applied automatically). In most cases the
inferred constraints are sufficient for your initial constraints. As you continue to develop the sketch,
you may need to add additional constraints to properly stabilize the sketch geometry.
The effects of constraints on sketch geometry are shown in the following illustration. The sketch on
the left was purposely drawn using only some of the inferred constraints. The sketch on the right is the
result of adding additional constraints such as perpendicular, parallel, and collinear.

Initial inferred constraints only

After applying constraints

Definition of Geometric Constraints

Geometric constraints stabilize sketch geometry by placing limits on how the geometry can change
when you attempt to drag or dimension it. For example, if a horizontal constraint is applied to a line,
that line is forced to be horizontal at all times.
In the following illustration, the circle on the right is being resized. Tangent constraints have been
applied to the lines. As the circle is resized, the lines remain tangent to both circles.

86 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Constraint Types
You can use the following constraint types to constrain your sketches.

Constraint Description Before Constraint After Constraint

Tangent – Use to make selected elements
tangent to one another.

Perpendicular – Use to make selected

elements perpendicular to one another.

Parallel – Use to make selected elements

parallel to one another.

Coincident – Use to make two points exist at

the same point location.

Concentric – Use to force two arcs, circles, or

ellipses to share the same center point.

Collinear – Use to force two lines or ellipse

axes to lie on the same line.

Horizontal – Use to force the element to be

parallel to the X axis of the current sketch
coordinate system.

Vertical – Use to force the element to be

parallel to the Y axis of the current sketch
coordinate system.

Equal – Use to force two elements to be of the

same length. In the case of arcs or circles, the
radius becomes equal.

Fix – Use to cause an element to be fixed in

location to the current sketch coordinate
system.

Symmetric – Use to cause the elements to be

symmetrically constrained about a line.

Smooth – Use to cause a curvature

continuous condition (G2) between a spline
and another curve, line, arc or spline.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 87

 Horizontal Constraint Example
In the following illustration, the application of a horizontal constraint is shown. The two circles are
constrained to the endpoints of the line. The design intent requires these two circles to remain
aligned. After the horizontal constraint is applied to the line, the line updates and the circle on the
right side moves with the line.

About Constraint Inference and Persistence

By default, when you create sketch geometry, that geometry can automatically have geometric
constraints applied to it. To control when geometric constraints are automatically inferred and
applied in a sketch, you must understand what it means to have constraints inferred and the meaning
of persistence, and where and how to change their related settings.
In the following illustration, a sketch is shown being created along side the completed sketch with its
geometric constraints displayed. As the sketch geometry was being created, the geometric
constraints were automatically added to the geometry.

Definition of Constraint Inference and Persistence

As you are working in a sketch, several types of geometric constraints can be automatically applied to
sketch geometry as it is created. This includes constraints such as perpendicular, parallel, coincident,
horizontal, vertical, and tangent. The automatic application of geometric constraints is referred to as
constraint inference and persistence.
When you are sketching geometry and a valid geometric constraint to another sketch geometry is
identified, that constraint is said to be inferred. When a constraint is inferred, the constraint symbol for
that geometric type displays. If you click to create the sketch geometry when the constraint symbol is
displayed, and if the inferred geometric constraint is automatically applied to the sketch geometry,
then that constraint is said to be persistent. Depending on your settings, that inferred constraint may
or may not be automatically added to the sketch geometry.
The evaluation of sketch geometry for constraint inference occurs automatically based on the location
and relationship of the geometry being sketched to the existing geometry around it. You can have a
specific piece of sketch geometry inferred by passing the cursor back and forth over the geometry.
Passing the cursor back and forth over the sketch geometry is referred to as scrubbing the geometry.

88 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

You can control the automatic application of geometric constraints through the use of the Constraint
Inference and Constraint Options settings or the CTRL key.
By changing the Constraint Inference and Constraint Persistence options, you control whether
constraints are automatically inferred and applied, only inferred but not applied, or neither inferred
nor applied. When you press and hold CTRL as you create sketch geometry, no geometric constraints
are inferred or applied.
Having geometric constraints automatically applied to the sketch geometry as you create it means
you decrease the number of constraints required later to control the sketch geometry's shape, size,
and position.

User-Controlled Constraint Inference and Persistence

As you create sketch geometry, the automatic inference of constraints is dependent on the setting of
the Constraint Inference option, and the settings for the Constraint Options, as set in the Constraint
Options dialog box. The actual creation of an inferred constraint in the sketch is dependent on the
Constraint Persistence option.

Icon Option Description

Constraint Inference This setting controls whether or not sketch constraints are
inferred.

Constraint This setting controls whether or not inferred sketch constraints

Persistence are created.

You change the settings for the Constraint Inference and Constraint Persistence options on the
Standard toolbar. There are three different combinations of settings you can set for constraint
inference and persistence. You can have both settings off, only the inference setting on, or both on.
As you are creating sketch geometry, you can change the settings for Constraint Inference and
Constraint Persistence to match your requirements for the sketch geometry you are about to create.
The following table illustrates the settings for Constraint Inference and Constraint Persistence and
describes the various behaviors associated with these options.

Settings Behaviors
Both Off – As you create sketch geometry, you do not infer geometric
constraints other than coincident constraints. Therefore, the sketch
geometry does not automatically have geometric constraints like horizontal,
parallel, or perpendicular applied to its geometry. Lines can still snap to
horizontal and vertical, and point alignment can still occur if it is enabled.
Inference Only – As you create sketch geometry, you can infer geometric
constraints like parallel, perpendicular, and tangent. However, the only
geometric constraints automatically applied to the sketch are coincident
constraints. Use this setting to get the initial sketch geometry aligned and
positioned as you require without adding initial geometric constraints.
Both On – As you create sketch geometry, you can infer geometric
constraints such as parallel, perpendicular, and tangent. Any inferred
constraint is automatically added and applied to that sketch geometry.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 89

 Constraint Inference Options
You access the Constraint Options dialog box by clicking Constraint Options in the shortcut menu
when a sketch is active for editing. Within the Constraint Options dialog box, there are two areas for
setting constraint inference: Selection for Constraint Inference and Scope of Constraint Inference.
In the Selection for Constraint Inference area, you select which geometric constraints you want to infer
as you are creating new sketch geometry. For these options to be selectable, the Constraint Inference
option must already be on.
In the Scope of Constraint Inference area, you set either to automatically evaluate all sketch geometry
to infer constraints from, or to use only the sketch geometry you preselect.

Example Settings and Uses for Constraint Inference and Persistence

The way you set the Constraint Inference and Constraint Persistence options depends on the sketch
geometry you are creating and the workflow you want to follow. For example:
■
If you are sketching geometry that needs to be at varying angles other than horizontal, vertical,
parallel, and perpendicular to other geometry, you should have both settings off so the geometry
does not align in that manner nor have geometric constraints applied.
■
If you want to create the sketch geometry and manually apply each geometric constraint so it has
a specific constraint scheme, then you should have both settings off or have only the Constraint
Inference option on.
■
If you want to infer constraints and apply the constraints to the sketch geometry as you create it,
then you should have both settings on.

90 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

 In the following illustration, the progressive steps used to create the sketch are shown along the top.
The settings that were used for constraint inference and constraint persistence are shown at the
bottom with their respective constraint results.

Applying Geometric Constraints

Each type of constraint can be applied to certain types of geometry and in certain situations. Some
constraints such as perpendicular are relational constraints and must be applied to two elements in
the sketch. A relational constraint defines a geometric relationship between two objects. Other
constraints such as vertical can be applied to a single object or two points.

Accessing Constraint Tools

2D constraints are available on the 2D Sketch Panel. To access these tools, use the Constraint flyout.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 91

 Access

2D Constraints

Panel Bar: 2D Sketch Panel

Procedure: Applying a Horizontal Constraint

The following steps give an overview for applying a horizontal constraint.

1. On the panel bar, click the Horizontal constraint tool.

2. Select the geometry to be constrained.

Procedure: Applying a Horizontal Constraint Between Point and Midpoint

The following steps give an overview for applying a horizontal constraint between two points.

1. On the panel bar, click the Horizontal constraint tool.

2. Select a point such as the endpoint of a line or center of a circle.

92 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

3. Select the midpoint of an existing line.

The geometry is now constrained horizontally based upon the two points selected.

Procedure: Applying an Equal Constraint

The following steps give an overview for applying an equal constraint to two circles.

1. On the panel bar, click the Equal constraint tool.

2. Select a circle, line, or arc.

3. Select the circle, line, or arc to which you want to apply the equal constraint.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 93

 4. The selected geometry is now constrained to be equal in size.

Procedure: Applying a Symmetrical Constraint

The following steps give an overview for applying a symmetrical constraint.

1. On the panel bar, click the Symmetric tool.

2. Select the first sketch element for the constraint.

3. Select the second sketch element for the constraint.

4. Select a sketch element to be used for the symmetry line.

Note: You need to select the symmetry line only once during the current session.

94 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

 5. Continue selecting other sketch elements to apply the symmetric constraint.

Showing and Deleting Constraints

As you create and constrain your 2D sketches, you may need to view and possibly delete some
constraints. Using the Show Constraints tool, you can view the constraints applied to the selected
geometry and if necessary, select the constraint(s) and delete them. You can also use the Show All
Constraints tool to display the constraints on all the elements in your sketch.
The constraint toolbar for one piece of sketch geometry is shown in the following illustration. The
illustration also shows that selecting a constraint highlights the geometry it affects.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 95

 Showing Constraints on Multiple Objects
In the following illustration, the Show Constraints tool has been started. A selection window is used to
select multiple objects in the sketch. The constraints for each object selected are displayed. The cursor
is then moved to a single object to review the constraints related to that object.

Show Constraints Toolbar Features

You can use the Show Constraints toolbar in the following ways.

Option Method
Viewing constraints On the Show Constraints toolbar, click the constraint. The geometry referenced
by the selected constraint is highlighted.

Deleting constraints On the Show Constraints toolbar, select the constraint symbol and press Delete,
or right-click the selected constraint and click Delete.

Show All Constraints

Using the Show All Constraints tool, you can see all constraints applied to the active sketch geometry.
When you select the Show All Constraints tool, Show/Delete Constraint toolbars are displayed next to
each sketch element. Pause over or select the constraint symbol to highlight the constrained
geometry. Select the constraint symbol and press DEL to delete the constraint.

Access
You can use the following methods to access the Show All Constraints tool.

Option Method
Shortcut menu Right-click in the graphics window and click Show All Constraints (sketch must be active)

Keyboard F8 – Show all constraints

shortcut F9 – Hide all constraints

96 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

 The constraint toolbars are displayed next to each sketch element. Click and drag the bars on the
toolbars to move them to another location.

Guidelines for Successful Constraining

As you create sketch geometry, constraints are automatically applied. However, those constraints do
not always completely represent your design intent. Therefore, you must add constraints or delete
existing constraints.
The following list represents some guidelines to consider when you are placing constraints.
■
Determine sketch dependencies – During the sketch creation process, determine how sketch
elements relate to each other and apply the appropriate sketch constraints.
■
Analyze automatically applied constraints – As you create sketch geometry, some constraints
are automatically applied. After the sketch is created, you should determine whether any degrees
of freedom remain on the sketch. If required, delete the automatically applied constraints and
apply constraints to remove the degrees of freedom.
■
Use only needed constraints – When you apply constraints to your sketch geometry, take into
account the design intent and the degrees of freedom remaining on the sketch. It is not necessary
to fully constrain sketch geometry in order to create 3D features. In some situations you may be
required to leave sketch geometry underconstrained. You can use the constraint-drag technique
to see the remaining degrees of freedom on the sketch.
■
Stabilize shape before size – Before you place dimensions on your sketch elements, you should
constrain the sketch to prevent the geometry from distorting. As you place the parametric
dimensions, the sketch elements update to reflect the correct size. By stabilizing the geometry
with constraints, you are able to predict the effect the dimensions have on the sketch geometry. If
necessary, use the fix constraint to fix portions of the sketch.
■ Identify sketch elements that might change size – When constraining sketches, take into
account features that may change as the design evolves. When you identify sketch features that
may change, leave those features underconstrained. When a feature is left unconstrained, the
feature can change as the design evolves.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 97

 Guideline Examples
The following list illustrates and describes some basic constraint guidelines.

Determine sketch dependencies – In this

illustration, the two short vertical line segments must
remain perpendicular to the centerline, and the two
diagonals must remain parallel to each other.

Analyze automatically applied constraints –

In this illustration, the automatically applied
constraints on the right-side vertical line and the
lower diagonal line are being analyzed. The symbols
(glyphs) on the toolbars indicate the types of
constraints that have been applied. In this illustration
the perpendicular and parallel constraints are
highlighted.

Use only needed constraints – In this illustration, the

horizontal line has been intentionally left
underconstrained. This enables the designer to adjust
the position between the horizontal line and the
centerline.

Stabilize shape before size – In this illustration,

constraints are shown but no dimensions appear on
this sketch. The constraints have been added to
stabilize the sketch shape before dimensions are
applied to control its size.

98 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

 Identify sketch elements that might change size –
In this illustration, the dimensions complete the
constraint requirements. Notice how the short
horizontal line below the centerline is not
dimensioned for its position away from the centerline.
This line's position has been identified as an element
that may need to change, and thus is intentionally not
dimensioned.

Toggling Sketch Degrees of Freedom Glyph Display

When you are constraining a sketch, if you understand how sketch geometry is free to move and
rotate, it makes it easier to figure out your strategy for applying geometry and dimensional
constraints. By understanding the purpose of sketch degree of freedom glyphs and how to display
them, you will find that it is much easier to constrain the sketch geometry as you require.
In the following illustration, a sketch has all of its degrees of freedom glyphs being displayed for its
sketch geometry. Based on these glyphs, you get a visual understanding of how each object or
endpoint can move or rotate.

Sketch Degrees of Freedom

To visually identify how sketch geometry is underconstrained, you can have degrees of freedom (DOF)
glyphs appear for all or selected geometry in a sketch. As you constrain the sketch, the visible DOF
glyphs dynamically update to reflect the open degrees of freedom.
You toggle on and off the display of sketch geometry degrees of freedom glyphs in the active sketch
by clicking the corresponding option in the shortcut menu. When there is no sketch geometry
selected, the shortcut menu options are Hide All Degrees of Freedom and Show All Degrees of
Freedom. These options toggle on and off the DOF glyph display for all geometry in the active sketch.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 99

 If sketch geometry is selected when you right-click in the graphics window, you are then able to toggle
on and off the display of the degrees of freedom glyph for just that geometry by clicking the Display
Degrees of Freedom shortcut menu option.
In the following illustration, the same sketch is shown with sketch degrees of freedom glyphs before
and after adding three dimensions. After adding the three highlighted dimensions, much of the
geometry in the sketch had its degrees of freedom locked down. Degrees of freedom glyphs appear
only for the geometry that still has open freedom. The degree of freedom glyphs that are displayed
update to show just the open freedom for the geometry.

Procedure: Toggling Sketch Degrees of Freedom Glyph Display

The following steps give an overview of toggling on or off the display of all sketch degree of freedom
glyphs in an active sketch.

1. Right-click in an open area in the graphics window.

2. In the shortcut menu, click Hide All Degrees of Freedom or Show All Degrees of Freedom.

100 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Exercise: Constrain Sketches
In this exercise, you create and constrain sketch
2. On the Standard toolbar, click the 2D Sketch
geometry. Using the concepts and procedures
sketch tool and select the face on the part as
learned in this lesson, you create the slots on the
shown.
Pillow Block component.

3. On the panel bar, click the Two-Point

Rectangle tool and sketch a rectangle on the
The completed exercise face as shown.

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of
chapters and exercises, click Chapter 2:
Basic Sketching Techniques. Click
Exercise: Constrain Sketches.

1. Open Pillow-Block.ipt. 4. On the panel bar, click the Centerpoint circle

tool and create circles centered on the edge
of the rectangle and coincident to the
corners.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 101

5. On the panel bar, click the Vertical constraint
tool and select the midpoint of the left edge
and the centerpoint on the circle.

9. Right-click anywhere in the graphics window,

select Hide All Degrees of Freedom.
6. On the panel bar, click the Horizontal 10. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
constraint tool and select the midpoint of the the sketch.
face and the midpoint of the slot sketch.
11. On the panel bar, click the Extrude tool and
select inside each circle and the rectangle
area of the sketch. Adjust the options in the
dialog box as shown. Click OK.

The slot sketch is now centered on the face.

7. Press ESC to exit the Horizontal constraint
tool.
8. Right-click anywhere in the graphics window,
select Show All Degrees of Freedom. Observe
that while the slot is constrained centered on
the face, there remain many degrees of
freedom.
Note: The material is set to glass in the
following illustration to better display the
DOF symbols.

102 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

12. On the ViewCube, select the upper left corner
of the cube as shown.

13. On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool

and select the face on the part as shown.

14. Repeat steps 3 through 11 to create a slot on

this face of the part.

15. Save and close all files.

Lesson: Geometric Constraints ■ 103

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches

Overview
This lesson describes how to create and use various types of dimensions for your 2D sketch geometry.
Using dimensions for your sketches is a major aspect of constraining 2D geometry. While geometric
constraints stabilize the sketch and make it predictable, dimensions size the sketch according to your
design intent.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe the function and properties of parametric dimensions.
■ Create linear, radial, angular, and aligned dimensional constraints.
■
Use additional options when applying dimensions.
■
Describe best practices for dimensioning your sketch.

104 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

About Dimensional Constraints
You create dimensional constraints by adding parametric dimensions to your sketch. This is the final
step in fully constraining your sketch geometry. When you apply a parametric dimension to a sketch
element, the sketch element changes size to reflect the value of the dimension.
Various types of dimensions that you can apply to sketch geometry are shown in the following
illustration.

Definition of Parametric Dimensions

A parametric dimension is a dimension that, when placed on sketch geometry, determines the size,
angle, or position of the geometry. Associative dimensions in nonparametric applications report the
size, angle, or position of an object, whereas changes to parametric dimensions affect the object's size,
angle, or position.
In the following illustration, when the dimension is placed, the initial value is 47.232. When the value
is changed to 50 in the Edit Dimension dialog box, the width of the shape updates to reflect the new
value. Note the d0 text in the title area of the Edit Dimension dialog box. This is the parameter name.
Each time you place a parametric dimension, a unique parameter name is automatically assigned.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 105

 Unlike 2D CAD applications in which dimensions are simply numeric representations of the size of the
geometry, in a parametric 3D modeling application, dimensions are used to drive the size of the
geometry. With this technology, you can quickly change a dimension and immediately see how the
change affects the geometry.

Example
Several types of parametric dimensions are available, but only one dimension tool is used to create
them. The application places the appropriate type of dimension based on the geometry that you
select. When you are placing dimensions, the shortcut menu displays additional options for placing
the dimension.

Parametric Dimensions
The following illustration displays horizontal and vertical parametric dimensions, and the shortcut
menu which enables you to chose the type of dimension to place.

106 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Creating Dimensional Constraints
You use the General Dimension tool to place dimensions on your sketch. You can produce linear,
aligned, angular, radial, and diameter dimensions with this single tool.

Access

General Dimension

Panel Bar: 2D Sketch

Keyboard Shortcut: D

Procedure: Applying Linear Dimensions

The following steps describe how to apply a linear parametric dimension.

1. On the panel bar, click the General Dimension tool.

2. Select the sketch element for the linear dimension and place the dimension.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 107

 3. Select the dimension and enter a new value.

4. Press ENTER, or click the green check mark on the Edit Dimension dialog box, to have the
geometry change to reflect the new dimension.

5. Right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or continue placing
additional dimensions.

Procedure: Applying Radial/Diameter Dimensions

The following steps describe how to apply radial or diameter parametric dimensions.

1. On the panel bar, click the General Dimension tool.

2. Select the sketch element for the radial/diameter dimension and place the dimension.

3. Select the dimension and enter a new value.

4. Press ENTER, or click the green check mark on the Edit Dimension dialog box, to have the
geometry change to reflect the new dimension.

5. Right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or continue placing
additional dimensions.

108 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Procedure: Applying Angular Dimensions
The following steps describe how to apply an angular parametric dimension.

1. On the panel bar, click the General Dimension tool.

2. Select each element for the angular dimension and place the dimension.
Note: Select each element at any location other than their endpoints.

3. Select the dimension and enter a new value.

4. Press ENTER, or click the green check mark on the Edit Dimension dialog box, to have the
geometry change to reflect the new dimension.

5. Right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or continue placing
additional dimensions.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 109

 Procedure: Applying Aligned Dimensions
The following steps describe how to apply an aligned parametric dimension.

1. On the panel bar, click the General Dimension tool.

2. Select the sketch element for the aligned dimension. Position the cursor near the geometry.
Click when the Aligned Dimension icon is displayed.

3. Place the dimension.

4. Select the dimension and enter a new value.

5. Press ENTER, or click the green check mark on the Edit Dimension dialog box, to have the
geometry change to reflect the new dimension.

6. Right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu, or continue placing
additional dimensions.

Instead of positioning your cursor near the geometry to cause the Aligned Dimension icon to be
displayed, you can also select the element as you do when creating a linear dimension. Before
positioning the dimension, right-click and set the dimension type as an aligned dimension by
clicking Aligned on the shortcut menu.

110 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Dimension Values and Units
You click a dimension to define its value. If required, you can include specific units of measurement
such as millimeter, centimeter, meter, inch, and foot. It is not necessary to enter the suffix of the default
unit.
If your part consists of multiple units of measurement you must enter the nondefault unit suffixes. For
example, if the default unit of measurement is millimeters, you would enter a value of 50 millimeters
as 50 with no suffix. To specify a value of 50 centimeters in the same part, you would enter 50 cm.
The application evaluates the values as you enter them. Values shown in red indicate an improper
value or format, while values shown in black are considered to be valid.
Unit suffixes and parameters are case-sensitive. When you enter a unit suffix, it must be entered in
lowercase. For example, 50 cm would be evaluated correctly, while 50 CM is not valid.

Edit Dimension Flyout Menu Options

When applying parametric dimensions, the following options are available in the Edit Dimension
flyout.

Option Description
Measure Enables you to measure another sketch element or 3D feature. The
resulting value is placed in the Edit Dimension dialog box.
Show Dimensions Enables you to select a feature on the 3D part to display the
underlying dimensions. After the dimensions are displayed, you can
select a dimension for use in the existing dimension. The dimension
being referenced can be used alone or in a formula.
Tolerance Displays the Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to assign a
tolerance to the parametric dimension.
List Parameters Lists the current user parameters in a window, so you can select a
user parameter for use in the current dimension. This option is
displayed only if user parameters have been created.
Recently Used Values Displays a list of recently used values. Select any value for use in the
current dimension.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 111

 Additional Dimension Options
The following list represents additional options available on the shortcut menu when you place
dimensions.

Option Description
Edit Dimension While placing a dimension, right-click in the graphics window, and on the
shortcut menu click Edit Dimension. With this option set, the Edit Dimension
dialog box is displayed automatically after each dimension is placed.

Radial/Diameter When you place a dimension on an arc or circle, right-click in the graphics
Dimension Options window, and on the shortcut menu click Diameter or Radius to switch the
default mode of the current dimension. When dimensioning an arc, the default
mode is Radius. When dimensioning a circle, the default mode is Diameter.

Linear Dimension When you place a linear dimension to a line or two points at an angle, right-click
Options in the graphics window, and on the shortcut menu click the desired dimension
type.

112 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

 Option Description
Dimensioning to When you need to place a dimension to the quadrant of a circle, place the cursor
Quadrants near the quadrant and look for the quadrant dimension glyph. Select the arc or
circle at the point where the glyph is displayed.

About Dimension Display and Relationships

When you apply dimensions to your sketch elements additional options are available that you can use
to control the display of the dimensions. Also available are tools designed to assist you in creating
dimensions referenced from other features and/or dimensions.

Dimension Display
After you apply dimensions to your geometry, you can control the visibility of all dimensions in the
sketch and control the visual formatting of the displayed dimensions.
Being able to turn on and off the display of dimensions in a sketch means you have the flexibility when
working with complex sketch geometry to decide how much information you see. Turning off the
display of dimensions makes it easier to select the sketch geometry and review its general shape.
When dimensions are not displayed and you make a sketch invisible, the dimensions remain off when
you make the sketch visible again.
Using the optional display formats of Value, Name, Expression, Tolerance, and Precise Value can help
you evaluate the structure of equations in relational dimensions, toleranced dimensions, and
dimensions that contain equations.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 113

 Menu Description
Value The default mode. Displays the current value of the dimension at the
precision specified in the Document Settings dialog box.

Name Displays dimension names only. Dimension names are assigned

automatically, or you can specify them in the Parameters dialog box.

Expression Displays the dimensions as expressions. An expression can be as

simple as d0 = 26.4375; or a formula can be used, such as d0 = d1/2.

114 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

 Menu Description
Tolerance Displays the dimensions in a format associated with the specific type
of tolerance applied. If a tolerance has not been applied to the
dimension, there is no effect on the dimension display.

Precise Value Displays the dimension using its exact numeric value, regardless of
the Precision setting in the Document Settings dialog box.

Procedure: Selecting the Dimension Display Mode

The following steps describe how to select the mode for displaying model dimensions.

1. With nothing selected, right-click in the browser or graphic window.

2. On the shortcut menu, click Dimension Display, then click the desired option on the cascading
menu.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 115

 Referencing Other Dimensions
When you define the value of a dimension, you can reference an existing dimension by selecting the
dimension in the graphics window. The dimension parameter name is automatically entered in the
Edit Dimension dialog box.

Dimension being created

Dimension being referenced

The illustration shows dimension d28 being created equal to dimension d27. When you want to
reference other dimensions in a new dimension, with the Edit Dimension dialog box open, select an
existing dimension to reference. Your cursor changes to indicate that you are referencing an existing
dimension. When you select the existing dimension, the parameter name of the dimension you
selected is entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box. A dimension that references another dimension
has fx: preceding its value.

Dimensions Stored as Parameters

Each dimension you create is automatically named and stored as a parameter in the current part file.
Selecting the Parameters tool on the panel bar displays the Parameters dialog box listing the model
parameters.

Notice the parameter names d0 and d1. These names are generated each time a dimension is placed.
If you delete a dimension, its parameter is also deleted and the original dimension name is not used
again in the current part file. You can rename the default dimension names and modify their values in
the Parameters dialog box. In the previous illustration the parameter d2 is renamed to SleeveDia.

116 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches
Applying parametric dimensions is straightforward because you use a single command. Following
these guidelines assures that dimensions are properly applied to your sketch.
Consider the following guidelines when adding dimensions to your sketch:
■
Use geometric constraints when possible. For example, place a perpendicular constraint instead
of an angle dimension of 90 degrees.
■
Place large dimensions before small ones.
■
Incorporate relationships between dimensions. For example, if two dimensions are supposed to
be the same value, reference one dimension to the other. With this relationship, if the first
dimension changes, the other dimension changes as well.
■
Consider both dimensional and geometric constraints to meet the overall design intent.

These guidelines are not presented in any particular order and you do not apply all of them on
every sketch.

Example of Relationships Between Dimensions

Building relationships between dimensions captures your design intent. In this illustration, the intent
is for the circle to always remain centered on the part. Building this dimensional relationship ensures
that if the sketch width or length changes, the hole also moves in order to remain centered on the
sketch. The dimension display is set to expression for clarity.

In the following illustration, the length is changed. Notice how the hole moved to maintain its
centered position.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 117

 Without a dimensional relationship, a hole that was originally centered does not adjust if the length is
changed.

118 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

Exercise: Dimension Sketches
In this exercise, you apply dimensions to a sketch.
2. To rotate the view:
Using the techniques learned in this lesson, you
■
apply a variety of parametric dimensions to the On the ViewCube, click Front.
sketch geometry. ■ Click the arrow to rotate the view
counter-clockwise 90 degrees.

3. Constrain drag the sketch on various

elements to examine the constraint
conditions.
The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 2: Basic
Sketching Techniques. Click Exercise:
Dimension Sketches. 4. In the browser, double-click Sketch1 to
activate the sketch.
1. Open m_Rod-Support.ipt.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 119

5. Place an overall parametric dimension. 7. Add a vertical dimension in relation to the
■
overall dimension just created.
Start the General Dimension tool.
■
■
Select the lower left and right corners of Select the lower-left and upper-left
the sketch. corners of the sketch.
■
■
Place the dimension and select it. When the Edit Dimension dialog box is
■
displayed, select the 50 mm horizontal
In the Edit Dimension dialog box,
dimension.
enter 50.
■
■
In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter /2
Click the green check mark.
after the dimension parameter name.
■ The final dimension expression reads
d40/2.
■
Click the green check mark.

6. Set the Edit Dimension dialog box to

automatic. 8. Add an interior horizontal dimension.
■ With the General Dimension tool still ■
Check to make sure that the General
active, right-click in the graphics window. Dimension tool is still active.
■
Click Edit Dimension. ■
Select points as indicated.
■
The Edit Dimension dialog box is ■
In the Edit Dimension dialog box,
displayed automatically as you place enter 20.
dimensions. ■
Click the green check mark.

120 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

9. Add additional dimensions as shown. Do not
be overly concerned with placement as you
create the dimensions. You can drag the
dimensions to locations after all of them have
been created. Double-click each dimension
and adjust its value to those in the following
illustration if necessary.

10. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit

the sketch.
11. On the ViewCube click the Home icon.

12. Save and close all files.

Lesson: Dimensioning Sketches ■ 121

Chapter Summary

Properly constrained 2D sketches are the fundamental building blocks of parametric parts. By being
able to fully constrain the size and shape of your sketches, you can achieve the highest quality
parametric part designs.
Having completed this chapter, you can:
■
Use sketch tools to create 2D sketch geometry.
■
Use geometric constraints to control sketch geometry.
■ Apply parametric dimensions to your sketch geometry.

122 ■ Chapter 2: Basic Sketching Techniques

 Chapter

3
Basic Shape Design Chapter3:

In earlier lessons, you learned how to create and constrain 2D sketches. In this chapter, you are
introduced to the fundamentals of basic shape design by learning how to extrude, revolve, and
sweep 2D sketches to create 3D features. This chapter also covers the proper techniques for
adding multiple sketched features to your 3D design, creating more intelligent sketches by
referencing existing part edges and using construction geometry, and modifying your
parametric parts at any stage of the design process.

Objectives
After completing this chapter, you will be able to:
■
Create features using the Extrude and Revolve tools.
■ Use reference and construction geometry.
■
Use the browser and shortcut menus to edit parametric parts.
■
Use the 3D Grips tool to edit part geometry in the context of an assembly and in a
stand-alone part.
■
Create, locate, and utilize work features to perform modeling tasks.
■
Create swept shapes by sweeping a profile along a 2D or 3D path.

123
Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features

Overview
Two basic types of features exist: sketched features and placed features. The term sketched feature
refers to a 3D feature that is based on a 2D sketch. The term placed feature refers to a 3D feature that
you place on the existing faces and edges of the part, and which does not require a sketch. This lesson
describes sketched features and how to create them using the Extrude and Revolve tools.
Because most 3D models include some combination of extruded and revolved features, a basic
understanding of how to create them is essential to successful model creation.
The following illustration shows a 3D model that was created using multiple extrusion features.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Define sketched features and their attributes.
■
Use the Extrude tool to create extruded features.
■ Use the Revolve tool to create revolved features.
■
Use the Operation and Extent termination options when adding 3D features.
■
Orient sketch planes based on other planes or faces.

124 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

About Sketched Features
You create most 3D models by combining multiple extruded and revolved features. You start by
creating a 2D sketch that represents the basic shape of the part and then use different feature creation
tools to turn that 2D sketch into a 3D feature.

Definition of Sketched Features

Sketched features are 3D features that are created from an existing 2D sketch. These features serve as
the basis for most of your designs. When you create a sketched feature, you begin by first creating the
sketch or profile for the 3D feature. For simple sketched features, this profile usually represents a 2D
section of the 3D feature being created. For more complex sketched features, multiple sketches can
be created and used within one sketched feature.
The first sketch feature you create is considered the base feature. After you create the base feature,
additional sketched and/or placed features are added to the 3D model. As you add the additional
sketched features, options are available that control whether the secondary sketched features add or
remove material from the existing 3D geometry.

Sketched Feature Attributes

The key attributes of sketched features include the following:
■ An unconsumed sketch is required (not used by another feature).
■ Sketches can be used for both base and secondary features.
■
The result of the sketched feature can add or remove mass from the 3D geometry.

Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches

When you create a new part, the initial sketch is used as the basis of your 3D geometry. After the sketch
is created, you create a sketched feature, such as Extrude or Revolve, to create 3D geometry from the
initial sketch. When you create the 3D sketched feature, the sketch itself becomes consumed by the
3D sketched feature. Prior to this time, the sketch is considered unconsumed and can be used for any
sketched feature.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 125

 Unconsumed Sketch
The following illustration shows the initial sketch before it is consumed by the sketched feature.

Consumed Sketches
The following illustration shows sketches consumed by the sketched features. In the browser, the
sketches are nested below the sketched feature in which they were used.

126 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

 Typical Sketched Feature Creation
This illustration represents a typical workflow for creating a 3D part based upon sketched features. The
base sketch is created, which is used to create the base feature. Secondary sketches and features are
then added to the 3D model.

Creating Extruded Features

You use the Extrude tool to create extruded features from existing sketch profiles. Considered
sketched features, extruded features require an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. If the
sketch contains a single closed profile, that profile is selected automatically when you start the
Extrude tool. If the sketch contains more than one profile, you are required to select the profiles to be
included in the extruded feature.

Examples of Simple Extruded Profiles

In this example, the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded
feature.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 127

 In this example, the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded
feature with holes.

Access

Extrude

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: E

Extrude Options
The Extrude dialog box is displayed when you start the Extrude tool.

128 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

The following features and options are available in the Extrude dialog box:

Dialog Box Option Description

Access
Profile Click this button to select geometry to be included in the
extrusion. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been
selected for the extrusion feature.
Output Specify the desired output option, Solid or Surface.

Direction Select the direction icon, or click and drag the preview of
the extrusion in the desired direction.
Operation Specify the operation:
Join – Create initial feature or add volume to models.
Cut – Remove volume from models.
Intersect – Create new feature from shared volume of
two features.

Extrude Sample
You can select a corner of your part and drag the distance setting, as shown in the following
illustration.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 129

 Procedure: Creating an Extruded Feature
The following steps describe how to create an extruded feature.

1. Create a new sketch.

2. On the panel bar, click the Extrude tool.

3. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the options as required.

4. The extruded feature is created.

130 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Creating Revolved Features
You use the Revolve tool to create revolved features from existing sketch profiles. You can revolve the
profile at a full 360 degrees or at a specified angle. The Revolve tool requires an unconsumed and
visible sketch to be available. When you start the Revolve tool, if the sketch contains a single closed
profile, that profile is selected automatically.

Examples of Simple Revolved Profiles

In the following illustration, the sketch contains a closed profile and one centerline. When you start
the Revolve tool, the centerline is automatically selected as the axis of revolution.

In the following illustration, the sketch contains a single closed loop profile, reference geometry, and
one centerline. The profile is revolved with the Cut feature relationship.

Access

Revolve

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: R

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 131

 Revolve Options
The Revolve dialog box is displayed when you start the Revolve tool.

The following features and options are available in the Revolve dialog box:

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Profile Click this button to select geometry to include in the
revolved feature. A red arrow indicates that no
profiles have been selected for the revolved feature.
Axis Click this icon to select the line segment to use as the
axis for the revolve feature.
Tip: If the sketch contains a centerline, it is selected
automatically as the axis.
Output Specify the desired output option, Solid or Surface.

Angle Specify an angle and direction for the revolution.

Full This option revolves the profile 360 degrees.

132 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Facts About Revolved Features
■ If the sketch contains a centerline, it is selected automatically as the axis for the revolved feature.
■
If the sketch contains more than one profile, you are required to select the profiles to include in the
feature.
■ If the profile being revolved is closed, you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of
the revolution.
■
If the profile being revolved is open, the revolution results in a surface.

Procedure: Creating a Revolved Feature

The following steps describe how to create a revolved feature.

1. Create a new sketch containing a profile to revolve. If the profile is being revolved about a
centerline, consider using the Centerline style on the line segment.

2. On the panel bar, click the Revolve tool. In the Revolve dialog box, adjust the options as
required.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 133

 3. Create additional sketch geometry as required.

4. On the panel bar, click the Revolve tool. Select the geometry to be included in the revolved
feature. Adjust the options as required.

134 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Specifying Operation and Extents
You use the Join, Cut, and Intersect operations to control how the feature you are creating affects
existing features. By default, the Cut and Intersect operations are not available with base features.
You use the Extents options to define the termination of a feature. For example, you can extrude
a 2D sketch a specific distance or you can terminate the feature on an existing face of the model.

Example of Operation and Extents

In the following example, multiple sketched features with different operations and extents were used
to define the shape of the part.

Specifying Operation: Join, Cut, and Intersect

When you create sketched and placed features, you can adjust operation options to control the effect
of the current feature on existing features. These operations are not available for the first feature of
the part.
The feature relationship options are available when using Extrude, Revolve, Loft, Sweep, and Coil.
The following illustration shows an example of these options in the Extrude dialog box.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 135

 Use the following options with the extrude tool.

Dialog Box Option Description

Access
Join This option joins the result of the extruded feature being created to
existing part geometry. Using this option results in material being
added to the existing part. A green preview indicates material is
being added.

Cut This option cuts the result of the extruded feature being created
from the existing part. Using this option results in material being
removed from the existing part. A red preview indicates material is
being removed.

Intersect This option removes material from the existing part by comparing
the volume of the existing features and the feature being created
and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features
and the new feature. A blue preview indicates an Intersect
relationship.

136 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Specifying Extents
When you create extruded and revolved features, you can specify termination options for the feature
in the dialog box. Depending on the option you choose, different interface options are available. By
specifying termination options, you can control where the feature starts and ends.
The following illustration shows the Extents options that are available in the Extrude dialog box.

Option Description
Distance This option extrudes the profile according to the distance specified.

To Next This option extrudes the profile to the next possible face or plane. Use the
Terminator icon to select a solid or surface on which to terminate the
extrusion.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 137

 Option Description
To This option extrudes the profile to terminate on the selected face, plane,
or point. If the selected termination face does not completely enclose the
extrusion profile, select the Extended Face option to terminate the
feature on the extended face.

From To This option extrudes the profile by starting the extrusion at the face
selected with the From option and ending the extrusion at the second
face selected. If necessary, use the extend face option.

All This option extrudes the profile all the way through the part. If the part
changes, the extruded feature continues to go all the way through the
part.

138 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

 Option Description
Extended Face This option extends a selected face with the To and From To options. The
extrude does not build the extrusion if the sketched feature extends
beyond the termination face. With the Extend option selected, a
termination face becomes infinite in size.

Additional Extents Options for Revolve

The following options are available for the Revolve tool.

Option Description
Full This option revolves the profile a complete revolution around a
specified axis. If the part changes, the revolved feature continues to go
all the way around the part.

Angle This option revolves the profile a specified number of degrees around
an axis.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 139

 Procedure: Specifying Operations
The following steps describe how to specify operations.

1. Create additional sketch geometry on an existing feature.

2. On the panel bar, click the Extrude tool.

3. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the operations as required. In this example, Join is selected.

4. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.

140 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Procedure: Specifying Extents
The following steps describe how to specify extents.

1. Create additional sketch geometry on existing features as required.

2. On the panel bar, click the Extrude tool.

3. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the options as required. In this example, All is selected.

4. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 141

Orienting Sketches
When you create the first sketch for the base feature of your part, you usually use the default XY sketch
plane. However, the sketches that you create to add new features to the part often need to be oriented
to other part faces.
The sketch plane has been oriented to the selected part face in the following illustration.

Procedure: Creating a Sketch Plane Aligned to a Selected Face

The following steps describe how to create a new sketch plane aligned to a selected face.

1. Right-click in a face of the part. Click New Sketch.

2. The sketch plane is created on the selected face.

142 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Procedure: Creating Sketch Planes Offset from a Part Face
The following steps describe how to create a new sketch plane offset from a selected face.

1. On the Standard toolbar, click Sketch.

2. Click in the face and drag the sketch plane away from the selected face.

3. In the Offset dialog box, enter a value for the offset and click the green check mark. The sketch
plane is created offset from the selected face at the distance you specified.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 143

Exercise: Create Extruded Features
In this exercise, you build an Index Slide part file
2. Extrude the sketch 28 mm.
using several extruded features. Some initial
■ Click the Extrude tool.
geometry has been created, but you are required to
create other sketch geometry. ■
Select the profile as shown.
■
For Distance, enter 28 mm.
■ Click OK.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create
Extruded Features.

3. On the Standard toolbar, in the Style list,

Create Extruded Features Specific select Nickel (Bright).
Distances
In this portion of the exercise, you extrude an
existing sketch to create a base feature. Then you
create a new sketch and extrude it a specific distance
to create another sketched feature.

1. Open Index-Slide.ipt.

144 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

4. Right-click the face on the end of the part. 7. Verify that your view looks like the following
Click New Sketch. illustration.

8. Use the Project tool to create geometry for

the sketched feature.
5. Change your view to look normal to your ■
On the panel bar, click Project Geometry.
sketch plane. ■
Select the edges marked (A), (B), (C), (D),
■
On the Standard toolbar, click Look At. and (E).
■ Select the same face on the part.

9. Using the Line tool, sketch the line segments

for the profile as shown.

6. Use the ViewCube tool to change your

display orientation.
■
In the upper left corner of your drawing,
move the cursor to the ViewCube.
■
Select the clockwise arrow to rotate the
view 90 degrees.

10. Apply a colinear constraint to the two lines

marked (A) and (B).

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 145

11. Apply a horizontal constraint to the midpoint
of line (C) and the midpoint of the bottom
edge (D).

12. Apply parametric dimensions to the sketch.

■
Start the General Dimension tool.
■ Place dimensions as shown here.
■
Right-click anywhere in the graphics
window. Click Done.

16. Close all files without saving.

13. Right-click anywhere in the graphics window.

Click Home View. Create Extruded Features to
Existing Geometry
14. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the sketch. In this portion of the exercise, you create a new
15. Extrude the new sketch and remove material sketch and extrude it to a point on the part to create
from the part. a sketched feature.
■
Start the Extrude tool. 1. Open Index-Slide2.ipt.
■
In the graphics window, select the profile
shown.
■
For Distance, enter 48 mm.
■
Select Cut and make certain the extrude
direction is as shown.
■
Click OK.

146 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

2. Turn on the Autoproject Edges option for
sketching.
■
Click Tools menu > Application Options.
■
In the Options dialog box, Sketch tab,
select the Autoproject Edges for Sketch
Creation and Edit option.
■
If this option is already checked, leave it
as is.
■ Click Close.

5. Using the Center Point circle tool, create two

concentric circles.

6. Apply a horizontal constraint to the sketched

circles.
■
On the panel bar, click Horizontal
3. Right-click the top face of the part.
constraint.
Click New Sketch.
■ Select the centerpoints marked (A)
and (B).
■
Right-click anywhere in the graphics
window.
■
Click Done.

4. Change your view to look normal to the

sketch plane.
■ On the Standard toolbar, click Look At.
■
Select the top face of the part.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 147

7. Remove a portion of the sketched circles. 11. To extrude the new sketch to a specific point
■
on the part, start Extrude.
On the panel bar, click Trim.
■
■
Select the circles at a point outside of the Select the profile created by the two
boundary of the part. arcs (1).
■
In the Extents list, select To.
■
Select the corner vertex point (2) for the
To point.
■
Click the Cut operation option. Click OK.

8. Use the General Dimension tool to locate and

size the sketch.
■
Start the General Dimension tool.
■ Place dimensions on the arcs and center
point as shown.
12. Close all files without saving.

9. Return to the home view.

10. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the sketch.

148 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Exercise: Create Revolved Features
In this exercise, you create a simple Indexer part file using the Revolve tool. The origin Z axis is projected on
the first sketch and changed to a centerline. You use the Project Geometry and Project Cut Edges tools to
create different profiles to be revolved.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise 3. Change your display to a view that is normal

To complete the exercise, follow the
to the sketch.
steps in this book or in the onscreen ■
On the Standard toolbar, click Look At.
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters ■ In the browser, select Sketch1.
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create
Revolved Features.

Create Revolved Features that Add

Material to the Part
In this portion of the exercise, you create a sketch
and revolve it into the base feature. You create
another sketch and revolve it, creating another
sketched feature that adds material to the part. 4. Use the Two Point Rectangle tool and sketch
a rectangle similar to the following
1. Open Indexer.ipt. illustration.
2. In the browser, double-click Sketch1.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 149

5. Use the General Dimension tool to dimension 9. Create a new sketch using the default XZ
the sketch as shown here. plane.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch
tool.
■
In the browser, expand the origin folder.
■
Select XZ Plane.

6. Switch to the home view.

7. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the sketch.
8. Start Revolve.
■
The profile is selected automatically
because it is the only closed profile on the 10. Press F7 to activate the Slice Graphics mode.
sketch. This viewing mode slices the graphics at the
■
The centerline is also selected location of the current sketch. It is available
automatically as the axis. only in sketch mode.
■ Click OK to accept the default settings.

11. On the panel bar, Project Geometry menu,

click the Project Cut Edges tool.
Reference geometry is created based on the
location of the current sketch as it passes
through the part.

150 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

12. Use the Project Geometry tool to create an 15. Complete the sketch by adding dimension
axis for the Revolve command. constraints.
■ ■
Start Project Geometry. Start General Dimension.
■ ■
In the browser, select the Z axis. This Dimension the sketch geometry as
projects the origin Z axis onto the current shown.
sketch.

16. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit

the sketch.
17. To revolve the new sketch, start Revolve.
■ Select the profiles as shown.
13. Create new sketch geometry.
■
■
Start Two Point Rectangle. Click the Axis Select tool. Select the line
■
created from the projection of the Z axis.
Sketch two rectangles as shown.

14. Apply a colinear constraint to the edges 18. Complete the settings for the revolved
marked (A) and (B). feature.
■
From the Extents list, select Angle.
■
For Angle, enter 60 deg.
■ Select Flip Direction if required to match
the following illustration.
■
Click OK.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 151

 3. Press F7 to switch to Slice Graphics mode.
4. On the panel bar, click the Project Cut Edges
tool.
19. Close all files without saving.

Create Revolved Features that Remove

Material from the Part
In this portion of the exercise, you use Revolve to
create an additional sketched feature that removes
material from the part.

1. Open Indexer2.ipt.
5. Sketch and constrain two rectangles.
2. Begin a sketch by using the YZ plane in the ■
browser. Start Two Point Rectangle.
■ Sketch two rectangles as shown.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch ■
tool. Use the General Dimension tool to apply
■
the dimensions as shown.
In the browser, expand the Origin node
and select the YZ plane.

152 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

6. Project the Z axis for use in the Revolve 9. Complete the settings for the revolved
operation. feature.
■ ■
Start Project Geometry. From the Extents list, select Angle.
■ ■
In the browser, select the Z axis. In the Angle field, enter 60.
■ Click the Cut Feature Relationship icon.
■
Click OK.

7. Right-click in the graphics window.

Click Done.
8. Revolve the two rectangles to remove
material from the part.
■
Right-click in the graphics window.
Click Create Feature > Revolve.
■ Select the two profiles as shown. 10. Change your display by using Orbit.
■ ■ On the Standard toolbar, click Orbit.
Click the Axis icon.
■ ■ Rotate your part to view the cuts on the
Select the line that was projected from
the Z axis. bottom of the part.

11. Close all files without saving.

Lesson: Creating Basic Sketched Features ■ 153

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching

Overview
This lesson describes the use of reference and construction geometry to add design intelligence to
sketches on your parts. As your part progresses, you add multiple sketched features. Each sketch may
require the use of reference and construction geometry to fully constrain your sketches.
In the following illustration, reference geometry and construction lines are used to constrain the
rectangle geometry on the face of the part.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe sketch linetypes and their behavior.
■
Use the 2D sketch tools to create construction geometry.
■ Project part edges onto a sketch plane.

154 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

About Sketch Linetypes
As your part design progresses, you need additional sketching tools to capture design intent within
your sketch and to establish parametric relationships to existing faces and edges on your 3D part. As
you create 2D sketch geometry, such as lines, arcs, circles, and prismatic shapes, you can use different
linetypes for different purposes.
In the following example, several linetypes are used to define, position, and constrain geometry on
the part.

Normal sketch geometry

Construction geometry
Reference geometry
Centerline geometry

Definition of Sketch Linetypes

The following illustration shows the appearance of the different linetypes. Different linetypes display
in different colors in the sketch environment; however the exact color is based on the color scheme
you have selected. In the following illustration, using the Presentation scheme, lines 2 and 3 are
displayed orange, while the reference geometry (4) is green. The reference geometry consists of
projected edges of the solid model (arrows).

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching ■ 155

 Sketch Linetypes
The following are the different linetypes and how they are used.

Linetype Description

Normal This is the default linetype in a sketch. Normal lines define the profile
or path that is used to define the shape of a sketched feature.
Construction Construction lines are used to aid in constructing and constraining
normal geometry. You use construction lines when you need
additional geometry to constrain a sketch but do not want that
additional geometry to participate in defining the profile for the
feature.
Centerline The Centerline linetype is another type of Construction linetype. It
can be used to define the centerline about which to revolve a profile
to create a revolved feature. When you add dimensions between
centerlines and other sketch geometry, they are treated as diameter
dimensions.
Reference Reference geometry is geometry that is projected onto your sketch
from existing part vertices, edges, and faces. You use reference
geometry to constrain normal sketch geometry to existing features
on the part. Reference geometry remains associative to the original
part vertices, edges, and faces. You can also use reference geometry
to define the profile or path for a sketched feature.

Normal Linetype Example

The notched rectangle sketch on the left, consumed in the block feature on the right, has been created
with the Normal linetype. While sketching, normal lines are represented as solid lines.

156 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Construction Linetype Example
In the following example, the diagonal dotted line in the left image is a construction line. The
endpoints of the construction line are constrained to the opposite corners of the face. The midpoint
of the construction line is used to orient the center of the circle, which is defined with a normal
linetype. The circle is then extruded with the Cut option to define a shaft opening in this block.

Reference Geometry Example

The current sketch plane in this example is coplanar with the side of the base of the part. Reference
geometry is projected to the sketch plane from the perimeter of the part, from the hole through the
part, and from the spherical cutout on the top.

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching ■ 157

 Centerline Linetype Example
The dashdot line on the left is a centerline. The circle is revolved around the centerline to create the
torus feature on the right.

Creating and Using Construction Geometry

You can use construction geometry to help you control and define a sketch by using geometric
construction techniques rather than complex dimensions and formulas. You can constrain and
dimension construction geometry like any other 2D sketch geometry. You can use construction
geometry as a reference for dimensions to other normal sketch geometry, as well as to constrain
normal sketch geometry.
In the following illustration, construction lines (1) are used to position the slot from the center of the
circle and along the angled construction line.

Tools for Creating Construction and Centerline Geometry

The Standard toolbar contains two buttons for creating construction and centerline geometry. Unlike
other toolbar buttons, these buttons also indicate the current status of the selected geometry or
drawing mode. When you click a button, you activate that specific mode. The selected mode remains
active until you click the button again.

158 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Access

Construction Geometry

Toolbar: Inventor Standard

You can use the following buttons to create or change existing geometry types.

Icon Option Description

Construction When this button is selected, all 2D geometry drawn is construction
Geometry geometry. To change existing geometry to construction, select the
geometry, then click this button.
Centerline When this button is selected, all 2D geometry drawn is centerline
Geometry geometry. To change existing geometry to centerline, select the
geometry, then click this button.

To convert normal geometry or dimensions, select the geometry or dimension and then click the
appropriate type button on the Standard toolbar.

Procedure: Creating Construction Geometry

The following steps outline the procedure for creating construction geometry.

1. On the Standard toolbar, click the Construction tool.

2. Using standard sketching tools, create the required 2D geometry.
In the following example, a construction line was sketched between the opposite corners of a
rectangle. The lines defining the rectangle are normal sketch lines.

3. Click the Construction tool again to return to creating normal sketch geometry.

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching ■ 159

 Procedure: Converting Existing Geometry to Construction Geometry
The following steps outline the procedure for converting existing sketch geometry to construction
geometry.

1. To change existing geometry to construction geometry, select the geometry in the graphics
window.
In the following example, a circle was selected.

2. On the Standard toolbar, click the Construction button. The selected geometry is changed to
construction geometry.

Procedure: Creating Centerline Geometry

The following steps outline the procedure for creating centerline geometry.

1. On the Standard toolbar, click the Centerline tool.

160 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

2. Using standard sketching tools, create the required 2D geometry.
In the following example, a vertical centerline was sketched to the left of the normal sketch
geometry.

3. Click the Centerline tool again to return to creating normal sketch geometry.

Procedure: Converting Existing Geometry to Centerline Geometry

The following steps outline the procedure for converting existing sketch geometry to centerline
geometry.

1. To change existing geometry to centerline geometry, select the geometry in the graphics
window.
In the following example, a horizontal line that bisects the slot shape is selected.

2. On the Standard toolbar, click the Centerline button. The selected geometry is changed to
centerline geometry.

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching ■ 161

Creating and Using Reference Geometry
Reference geometry is geometry that is created when existing vertices and edges of the part are
projected onto the active sketch plane. Reference geometry is not drawn; rather it is created when you
define a new sketch plane on a planar face of the part or by using the Project Geometry tool. Without
reference geometry, you cannot dimension or constrain sketch geometry to the existing features on
the 3D part.

New Sketches and Reference Geometry

When you create new sketches on a planar face of the part, the edges of the selected face are
automatically projected onto the sketch as reference geometry. You can use this reference geometry:
■
To dimension to other sketch geometry.
■
For relational constraints to other sketch geometry.
■ As the basis for defining the path or profile for a sketched feature.

162 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

The following example demonstrates how reference geometry is created and used when defining a
new sketch on an existing part face.

A new sketch is created on an existing part face. Create additional sketch geometry and use the
The coplanar edges of the existing part face are projected reference geometry for dimensions
automatically projected onto the new sketch. or constraints.

Project Geometry Tool

You use the Project Geometry tool to project additional part vertices and edges that are not coplanar
to the sketch plane onto the sketch as reference geometry. When you use the Project Geometry tool,
you are prompted to select geometry to project onto the current sketch plane. As you select the
geometry, it is projected onto the current sketch plane as reference geometry and is always
associative to the original source geometry. This means that if the source geometry changes, the
reference geometry also changes. However, after a reference geometry linetype is changed to another
linetype, it loses its associativity.

Projecting Part Edges

Following are some key attributes for projecting part edges:
■
Can be used as the basis for dimensions to new sketch geometry
■ Can be used to apply relational constraints to new sketch geometry
■
Cannot be dimensioned
■
Cannot be trimmed
■ Can be mirrored
■
Cannot be drawn; can only be created by using Project Geometry tool or by selecting the
Autoproject Edges option

Access

Project Geometry

Panel Bar: 2D Sketch Panel

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching ■ 163

 Autoproject Options
You can use the Autoproject functionality to speed projection of geometry to the sketch plane.

Autoproject for Sketch Creation

When you select the Autoproject Edges for Sketch Creation and Edit option on the Sketch tab in the
Options dialog box, the edges of the selected planar face are automatically projected onto the new
sketch when you create a new sketch plane on an existing face.

Autoproject Edges
When the Autoproject Edges During Curve Creation option is selected, you can autoproject geometry
by hovering the pointer over the geometry to be projected while sketching.

164 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Sketching Shortcut Menu
While sketching, right-click in the drawing area and click AutoProject. This enables you to hover over
geometry to automatically project onto the current sketch plane.

Procedure: Referencing Model Edge Geometry

The following steps outline how to create reference geometry during curve creation in a sketch by
autoprojecting model edge geometry.

1. Create a new sketch on the existing part.

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching ■ 165

 2. Begin sketching the required geometry. Right-click in the graphics window and click
AutoProject on the shortcut menu.

3. Hover over the geometry to project. It is automatically projected to the current sketch plane.

4. Continue sketching the required geometry as required.

Tip: You may consider turning off the AutoProject option until it is needed again. This action
prevents the accidental projection of geometry while sketching over existing part features.

166 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Exercise: Create a Part Using Construction and Reference
Geometry
In this exercise, you apply the Construction and
2. Click Tools menu > Application Options.
Centerline attributes to sketch geometry. You also
■
project and use reference geometry to create and On the Sketch tab, clear both of the
constrain sketch features. options to autoproject edges.
■ Click Close.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create a
Part Using Construction and Reference
Geometry. 3. Turn on the centerline linetype.
On the Inventor Standard toolbar, click
Centerline. The button is displayed as pressed
1. Create a new part using the Standard (mm).ipt in when active.
template.
■ Click File menu > New.
■
In the New File dialog box, click the
Metric tab.
■ Select Standard (mm).ipt.
4. Start your sketch by creating a vertical
■
Click OK. centerline.
■
Sketch a vertical line approximately
50 mm long.
■ Right-click and click Done.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click Centerline
to turn off centerline. The button is
displayed as raised when off.

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching ■ 167

5. Sketch and constrain the remaining objects 9. Create a new sketch plane and project a circle
as shown. as reference geometry.
■
Rotate your view as shown.
■ Create a sketch plane on the top of the
part as shown.
■
On the 2D Sketch Panel, click Project
Geometry. Select the large diameter to
project it to the sketch plane.

6. Right-click anywhere in the graphics window

and click Home View.
10. Sketch and constrain a rectangle using the
7. Revolve the sketch around the centerline projected reference geometry.
using an Extents value of Full. Your profile and ■
Sketch a rectangle and add the 4 mm
axis are selected automatically when you
general dimension.
start the Revolve tool.
■ Use a tangent constraint on each end of
the rectangle to the reference circle.
■
Use a horizontal constraint between the
midpoint of the left side of the rectangle
and the center point of the reference
geometry to locate the rectangle
centered on the part.

8. On the Standard toolbar, select Blue Pastel in

the Color list.

168 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

11. Extrude the rectangle sketch using the Cut 13. Create construction geometry that you use to
option and a distance of 6.3 mm as shown. locate a new sketch.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click
Construction to turn on the Construction
linetype.
■
Sketch three separate lines (1) as shown.
Tip: Right-click and click Restart to sketch
separate lines.
■ If necessary, use a coincident constraint
to constrain the endpoints to the center
of the circle (2).
■ On the Standard toolbar, click
Construction to turn off the Construction
linetype.

12. Create a new sketch plane on the bottom of

the part.
■
Create a new sketch plane on the bottom
surface as shown.
■ Use the Project Geometry tool and select
the outside edge of the sketch face to
project it as reference geometry.
14. Add the following dimensions to the
construction lines.

Lesson: Intermediate Sketching ■ 169

15. Add geometry constrained to the
construction geometry and reference
geometry.
■ Draw two circles as shown.
■
Use coincident constraints to constrain
the circles to both the construction
geometry (1) and the reference
geometry (2).
■
Dimension the circles as shown.

17. Your completed extrusion looks like the

following illustration. Save your part with the
name Latch-Nut.ipt and close all files.
16. Complete the feature by extruding the new
sketch with a cut operation.
■
Start the Extrude tool.
■ Select the two sketch circles for the
profile and click the Cut option.
■
For Extents select To. Select the circular
face as shown. Click OK to create the
extrusion.

170 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts

Overview
This lesson describes the various methods used to make changes to parametric part models. You can
edit sketches, modify features, and create and use parameters while making modifications to your
models.
Statistics show that designers spend more time making part modification and engineering changes
than they spend creating new parts. You need to be able to modify your existing part models
accurately and efficiently.
The following illustration shows a parametric part model before and after implementing changes to
existing features.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■ Edit features from the browser.
■
Edit sketches from the browser or toolbar.
■
Create and modify parameters and equations.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 171

Editing Features
After you create features on your parametric part, you can modify those features at any time.
Sometimes all you need to change is the size of the feature. Other times you may need to make a more
significant change. Autodesk Inventor provides multiple options for editing your designs.
The following illustration shows a part model before, and then after the extrusion distance was
modified.

Options for Editing Features

There are three basic ways to modify features on your parametric parts. With both sketched and
placed features, you can display and modify the dimensions to simply change the size of the feature,
or you can access the feature dialog box to make a more significant change, like changing an
operation, extrusion direction, or the extents of the feature. For sketched features you also have the
option to modify the sketch geometry. For example, you can add and delete dimensions or
constraints, or you can even modify the shape of the sketch by changing the sketch geometry.
In the following illustration, the left browser image shows the three options for editing a sketched
feature. The browser image on the right shows the two options for editing placed features.

172 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Editing Features Using Show Dimensions
If you want to change the size of a feature, you can use the Show Dimensions option to change the
value of an existing dimension. All sketch dimensions are displayed as well as other dimensions that
are used to define the feature size, such as extrusion depth, revolution angle, or taper value.

Editing Features Using Edit Feature

When you use the Edit Feature option to edit a feature, you are presented with the same dialog box
that you used when you created the feature. You can change the parameters, such as distance, feature
relationships, and termination options. You can also reselect geometry to be included in the feature.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 173

 Access

Show Dimensions

Browser: Double-click the feature.

Browser: Right-click the feature > Show Dimensions.

Access

Edit Feature

Browser: Right-click the feature > Edit Feature.

Procedure: Modifying a Feature Using Show Dimensions

The following steps describe how to edit a feature using the Show Dimensions option.

1. Right-click the feature in the browser and click Show Dimensions. All the controlling
dimensions are displayed on the feature in the graphics window.
2. Double-click the dimension to modify and enter a new value in the Edit Dimension dialog box.
3. Click Update on the Standard toolbar to apply the changes to the part.

Procedure: Modifying a Placed Feature Using Edit Feature

The following steps describe how to edit a placed feature using the Edit Feature option.

1. Right-click the feature in the browser and click Edit Feature. The dialog box used to create the
feature is displayed.
2. Change the settings or values in the dialog box, then click OK. The part automatically updates.

Procedure: Editing Extruded Features

The following steps describe how to edit extruded features.

1. In the browser, right-click the feature. Click Edit Feature.

2. In the Extrude dialog box, adjust the options as required to edit the feature.

Procedure: Editing Revolved Features

The following steps describe how to edit revolved features.

1. In the browser, right-click the feature. Click Edit Feature.

2. In the Revolve dialog box, adjust the options as required.

174 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Editing Sketches
As you build your parametric model, you create multiple sketches. When the sketch is used by a
feature such as Extrude or Revolve, the sketch becomes consumed by the feature and is displayed
under the feature in the browser. You can see each of the sketches in the browser by expanding the
particular feature(s). Even though this sketch is consumed by the feature, it can still be modified.
The following illustration shows how sketches are consumed by the feature for which they are used.

Consumed sketches: The Extrusion1 feature has consumed Sketch1, Extrusion2 has consumed
Sketch2
Unconsumed sketch

Editing Consumed Sketches

One powerful way to modify a feature is to edit the sketch. Editing the sketch places the model in a
rolled-back state, where only the features existing at the time this sketch was created are visible. When
you edit sketches, you are returned to the sketch environment and the panel bar changes, providing
you with access to all the sketch tools initially used in creating the sketch.You can add, replace, or
delete dimensions or constraints and even modify the sketch geometry. To return to the part
modeling environment, click Return on the Standard toolbar.
In the following illustration, Sketch1 has been consumed by Extrusion1 in the browser. You can
expand the Extrusion1 feature to expose and edit the consumed sketch. Notice the browser
background color changes to indicate the active sketch.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 175

 Access

Edit Sketch

Browser: Double-click the sketch.

Browser: Right-click the feature > Edit Sketch.
Toolbar: Standard > Sketch > Select the sketch in the browser.

Procedure: Editing Sketches

The following steps describe how to edit sketches.

1. In the browser, right-click the feature or sketch, and click Edit Sketch.

176 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

2. After the sketch has been activated for editing, you can make changes to geometry,
dimensions, and constraints.

3. Continue to make edits to the sketch as required.

4. When you have finished editing the sketch, click Return on the Standard toolbar to exit the
sketch and return to the part model. The changes in the sketch are applied to the 3D features
of the part.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 177

Using Parameters
When you establish a relationship between one dimension and another, you can incorporate basic
design intent into your model and quickly modify a model. You can define and control complex
relationships by creating mathematical equations in a dimension or user-defined parameter.
Equations can range from simple equations to more complex equations that include complex internal
parameters.

Access

Parameters

Panel Bar: 2D Sketch

Panel Bar: Part Features
Menu: Tools

To establish a valid relationship to a parameter name, the spelling and capitalization must
exactly match the name displayed in the Parameters dialog box. Select a custom parameter
name from the list to ensure that spelling and capitalization match.

178 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Parameters Dialog Box
The Parameters dialog box is displayed when you start the Parameters tool.
The following illustration shows the Parameters dialog box with model, reference, and user
parameters. Notice that some model parameters were renamed to clarify use and facilitate access.
The equations in this example range from a single numeric value to more complex equations that use
functions and parameters.

Managing Parameters
Every dimension that you add when you create or assemble parts is accessible in the Parameters
dialog box. You can manage parameters in the Parameters dialog box to accomplish the
following tasks:
■
Create new user parameters.
■
Change the name of model and user parameters to add meaning. For example, you can give
model parameters a generic letter d and an incremental number (d0, d1, d2, and so on).
■
Change the unit of measure to match your design data. For example, you can create a user
parameter to store a volume value and use it later in an equation to calculate the size of a part.
■ Establish a mathematical equation to calculate a value.
■
Add or adjust the tolerance or precision for a dimension.
■
Adjust a dimension with tolerances at the maximum, minimum, median, or nominal value.
■ Select a parameter to export to a custom iProperty value.
■
Add a general comment to explain the function or purpose of a parameter.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 179

 List Parameters
You can select an existing custom parameter name for any dimension value. Right-click the value or
click the arrow button on the right side of the value and click List Parameters to display a list of
available custom parameter names.

In this image, you right-click the value 15 This image shows the Parameters list that
and click List Parameters. opens when you click List Parameters.

Using Equations and Parameters

You can use equations wherever you can enter a numeric value. For example, you can write equations
in the Edit Dimension dialog box, feature dialog boxes, and the Parameters dialog box. Equations can
vary in complexity, and you can use them to calculate feature sizes, calculate assembly constraint
offsets or angles, or simulate motion among several components.
Equations can be simple or contain many algebraic operators, prefixes, and functions. For example,
here is a simple equation:
2 ul * (6 + 3)
The following complex equation uses internal parameters such as pi:
( PI rad /5 ul + (25 deg * PI rad / 180 deg ) )

Supported Algebraic Operators

The following table lists the algebraic operators supported by Autodesk Inventor.

Operator Meaning
+ addition

- subtraction

% floating point modulo

* multiplication

/ division

^ power

( expression delimiter

) expression delimiter

; delimiter for multiargument functions

180 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Supported Unit Prefixes
The following table lists the unit prefixes supported by Autodesk Inventor.

Prefix Symbol Value

exa E 1.0e18
peta P 1.0e15
tera T 1.0e12
giga G 1.0e9
mega M 1.0e6
kilo k 1.0e3
hecto h 1.0e2
deca da 1.0e1
deci d 1.0e-1
centi c 1.0e-2
milli m 1.0e-3
micro micro 1.0e-6
nano n 1.0e-9
pico p 1.0e-12
femto f 1.0e-15
atto a 1.0e-18

When you use unit prefixes in an equation, enter the prefix symbol. Do not enter the prefix itself. For
example, an equation that includes the unit nanometer might look like this: 3.5 ul * 2.6 nm.
When you add the unit prefix for nano to the meter unit, your equation is calculated based on the
length of 2.6 nanometers.

Prefix symbols are case sensitive. You must enter them exactly as they appear in the previous
table.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 181

 Supported Functions
The following table lists the supported functions.

Syntax Returns Unit Type Expected Unit Type

cos(expr) unitless angle
sin(expr) unitless angle
tan(expr) unitless angle
acos(expr) angle unitless
asin(expr) angle unitless
atan(expr) angle unitless
cosh(expr) unitless angle
tanh(expr) unitless angle
acosh(expr) angle unitless
asinh(expr) angle unitless
sqrt(expr) unit^1/2 any
sign(expr) unitless any (Return 0 if negative, 1 if positive.)
exp(expr) unitless any (Return exponential power of expression;
for example, return 2 for 100, 3 for 1000, and
so on.)
floor(expr) unitless unitless (Next lowest whole number.)
ceil(expr) unitless unitless (Next highest whole number.)
round(expr) unitless unitless (Closest whole number.)
abs(expr) any any
max(expr1;expr2) any any
min(expr1;expr2) any any
ln(expr) unitless unitless
log(expr) unitless unitless
pow(expr1;expr2) unit^expr2 any and unitless, respectively
random(expr) unitless unitless
isolate(expr;unit;unit) any any

Function names are case sensitive. You must enter them exactly as they appear in the
previous table.

182 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Unit Types
The unit type that you use with an equation depends on the type of data that you are evaluating. For
example, to evaluate a linear or angular value, you typically use a unit type of millimeters, inches, or
degrees (mm, in, or deg).
Some equations must return a unitless value, for example, an equation to solve the number of
occurrences in a pattern. You designate a unitless value with the characters ul. For example, 5 ul
means that the equation has been evaluated and returned the number 5, as in the number of
occurrences in a pattern.

Unit Types: Keep Them Consistent

Keep units consistent within equations containing parameters that represent different unit
types. You can do this using the Isolate function. For example, to calculate the number of
occurrences for a pattern that is based on one occurrence for each unit of a parameter named
Width, your linear equation would be:
isolate(Width;mm;ul)
The Number of Occurrences value in a dialog box requires a unitless (ul) result, but you are
referencing the unit width, which is a linear value. Therefore, you must convert the Width
parameter to a unitless value.
The following illustration shows how to break down the equation.

Order of Algebraic Operations

Equations are evaluated from the inside out, and evaluation precedence is given to functions.
For example, in the equation (15 * (25 + 3)), 25+3 is evaluated first, and the sum is multiplied by 15.
The result is 420.
The following table shows the algebraic operations in descending order.

Operation Symbol Example

parentheses () (abs( 5 * -2))
exponentiation ^ Length^2
negation - (-4.00 + Width)
multiplication or division * or / (Length * Width) or (Length / Width)
addition or subtraction + or - (-5.00 + Length - 0.50 * Width)

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 183

 Equation Color
When you create equations, the equation text is displayed in red until it is considered valid. At that
point, the equation text turns black.

Procedure: Using Equations in Dimensions

The following steps outline how to use equations in dimensions.

1. On the panel bar, click the General Dimension tool.

2. Select the geometry that you want to dimension.
3. Place the dimension.
4. In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter the equation.

5. Click the check mark icon to accept the value.

Procedure: Using Equations in a Dialog Box

The following steps outline how to use equations in a dialog box.

1. On the panel bar, click the feature type that you want to create.
2. Select the geometry required for the feature.
3. Enter the equation in any text box that requires a numerical value.

4. Click OK to create the feature and close the dialog box.

184 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Exercise: Edit Parametric Parts
In this exercise, you implement changes to the clutch
2. Display the dimensions on the original base
lever by editing sketches and features. You discover
sketch for editing.
that changing one feature may create problems with
■ In the browser, right-click Extrusion1.
other features that you will then need to edit as well.
■
Click Show Dimensions.
3. Modify the leftmost 25 mm dimension.
■
Double-click the leftmost 25 mm
dimension and change it to 30 mm.
■ On the Standard toolbar, click Update.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters 4. The previous edit caused a problem with
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic Extrusion3. You now edit Extrusion3 to
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Edit correct its size.
Parametric Parts.
■
In the browser, right-click Extrusion3.
■ Click Edit Sketch.

1. Open Aux-Clutch-Lever.ipt.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 185

5. Add a colinear constraint to control the left
edge of the slot.
■
On the 2D Sketch Panel, click the Colinear
constraint tool.
■
Select the left edge of the sketch and set
it colinear to the left edge of the feature
as shown.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click Return.

7. Modify the depth of the main extrusion.

■
In the browser, double-click Extrusion1.
The Extrude dialog box is displayed.
■
Change the 35 mm depth dimension and
6. Change the counterbore holes to countersink
change it to 40 mm as shown.
clearance holes.
■ Click OK.
■
In the browser, right-click Hole4.
Click Edit Feature.
■ In the Hole dialog box, set hole type to
Countersink (1) and Clearance (2) by
clicking the option button as shown.
■ Under Fastener, for Standard, select Ansi
Metric M Profile (3).
■
For Fastener Type, select Flat Head
Machine Screw (4).
■
For Size, select M2.5 (5). Click OK.

186 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

8. Modify the slot size of Extrusion4. 9. Change the size of the chamfer on the
■
Extrusion4 slot.
In the browser, expand Extrusion4.
■
■
Double-click Sketch10 to display its In the browser, right-click Chamfer1.
dimensions on the model. Click Edit Feature.
■ Change the Distance value to .5 mm as
■ Using the ViewCube tool, reorient the
part as shown. shown.
■
■
Double-click the 20 mm dimension and Click OK to implement the change.
change it to 25 mm as shown.
Click Return.

10. Save and close all files.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 187

Exercise: Create Parameters and Equations
In this exercise, you change the names of some of the
2. On the Part Features panel bar, click
existing dimensions to make them easier to identify
Parameters.
and reference. You also create relational dimensions,
■
dimensions that include both equations and In the Parameters dialog box, select the
parameters, and a user parameter. model parameter d0. Change its name to
Depth. Press ENTER.

The completed exercise

In the Parameters dialog box, review the

existing model, reference, and user
Completing the Exercise parameters. Notice any custom parameter
To complete the exercise, follow the names or parameters with an existing
steps in this book or in the onscreen equation instead of a single numeric value.
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
■
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic Click Done.
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create
3. In the browser, right-click the feature Hole1-
Parameters and Equations.
Index. Click Show Dimensions.
4. Right-click in the graphics window. Click
Dimension Display > Expression. Notice that
1. Open Wall-Cabinet-Side.ipt. all the dimensions have custom names. Also
notice the use of reference dimensions to
return a distance between sketch geometry.

188 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

5. In the browser, right-click Extrusion1. 7. In the browser, right-click the feature Hole1-
Click Edit Sketch. Index. Click Properties.
■
Change Height from 500 mm to 650mm. Notice the conditional suppression. In this
■
On the Standard toolbar, click Update. case, the value for the reference dimension
RemainWidth is less than 250 mm, and the
The part looks like the following illustration. feature is automatically suppressed.
Notice that the number of holes did not Click Cancel.
automatically change when the height
changed. You change this later in the
exercise.

6. In the browser, right-click Extrusion1.

Click Edit Sketch.
■ Change the dimension Depth from 8. In the browser, right-click the MidHole
300 mm to 200 mm. feature. Click Properties.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click Update. ■
Under Suppress, select the If check box.
The part looks like the following ■ Select RemainWidth from the list of
illustration.
parameters.
■
Enter 300 mm for the Less Than value.
■ Click OK.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 189

9. On the Part Features panel bar, click 11. In the row for the new HolesPerColumn user
Parameters. parameter, click the Unit column.
■ ■
In the row for the Depth model In the Unit Type dialog box, change the
parameter, click the Equation column. unit specification to ul.
■ ■
Change its value to 400. Press ENTER. Click OK.

10. To add a user parameter:

■ Click Add.
■
Under User Parameters, enter 12. In the row for the new parameter, click the
HolesPerColumn for the parameter Equation column.
name for the new user parameter. ■
Enter the following equation to calculate
■
Press TAB. the number of spaces as a whole number
that can fit in the remaining area.
floor(SpaceForHoles/HoleSpacing) + 1
■ Press ENTER. Click Done.

13. In the browser, right-click the feature

Rectangular Pattern1. Click Unsuppress
Features.
14. In the browser, right-click the feature
Rectangular Pattern1. Click Edit Feature.

190 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

15. In the Rectangular Pattern dialog box:
■ Delete the current value of 5 ul.
■
Right-click the text box. Click List
Parameters.

16. In the Parameters list, select HolesPerColumn.

Click OK.
17. On the Part Features panel bar, click
Parameters. Enter the following values in the
Equations column for the corresponding
parameters.
■ Depth = 300 mm. Press ENTER.
■
Height = 820 mm. Press ENTER.
■
Click Done.
■ On the Standard toolbar, click Update.

The part looks like the following illustration.

18. Save and close all files.

Lesson: Editing Parametric Parts ■ 191

Lesson: 3D Grip Editing

Overview
In this lesson, you learn how to use the 3D Grips tool to edit part geometry in the context of an
assembly and in a stand-alone part environment.

Instead of changing a parametric dimension value or adjusting sketch geometry to modify the size of
a part, you can use the 3D Grips tool to resize a part by dynamically modifying its faces or edges.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■ Describe 3D grip editing and its benefits.
■
Utilize the 3D Grips tool and adjust the geometry a visual distance, a numeric distance, or to a
specific geometric location.

192 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

About 3D Grip Editing
Modifying geometry with 3D Grips is a very fast and efficient way to adjust the geometry of your
model. You can also adjust fully constrained geometry with 3D Grips, thereby eliminating the need to
directly edit the dimension values that drive the feature.
Unlike the Edit Sketch and Edit Feature tools, with 3D grip editing, you can edit the geometry in a
direct and dynamic way without first having to activate the sketch or feature.
In the following illustration, the Edit Offset tool is used to apply an offset distance to the selected face.
The end result of this 3D grip edit directly affects the underlying sketch without having to activate it.

Definition of 3D Grip Editing

Editing with 3D Grips means quickly adjusting part geometry by selecting a face or edge, and then
selecting a new location for it, or specifying a distance to change its location.

The following list summarizes basic benefits of using 3D Grips.

■
Adjusting geometry with 3D Grips is useful during the conceptual design phase when the exact
distances and part relationships are not known.
■
You can use 3D Grips for sizing part geometry correctly within the context of the assembly.

Lesson: 3D Grip Editing ■ 193

 3D Grip Edit Example
The following illustrations show the effects of grip editing a wrench component within the context of
an assembly.

1. Before editing with 3D Grips.

2. The edit with 3D Grips.

3. After editing with 3D Grips.

194 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Using the 3D Grips Tool
You use the 3D Grips tool to push or pull the faces of an extruded, revolved, or swept feature.
You can use 3D Grips in the following ways:
■
Drag the grip the desired distance.
■
Select other geometry to adjust to.
■ Enter a specific value.

Tool Access

3D Grips

Shortcut Menu: Right-click a grip-editable face. Click 3D Grips.

Access to the 3D Grips tool is based on the following requirements:

■ The 3D Grips tool is available only in assembly and part environments.
■
The 3D Grips tool is available from the shortcut menu only after you select a feature, face, or sketch.

3D Grips Application Options

Application Options

Menu: Tools > Application Options, Part tab

Lesson: 3D Grip Editing ■ 195

 Application Options 3D Grip Settings
The Application Options dialog box, Part tab, 3D Grips area.

Choose to enable or disable 3D grips.

Choose to display a grip when selecting the face or an edge of the part.
Control how dimensional constraints are handled by 3D grip actions.
■ Never Relax – Use this setting to prevent grip editing of a feature defined with a linear or
angular dimension.
■
Relax if No Equation – Use this setting to prevent grip editing of a feature defined with an
equation.
■ Always Relax – Use this setting to allow grip editing of a feature regardless of how it is
defined.
■
Prompt – Use this setting to receive a prompt, giving you the option to always relax when
grip editing a feature defined with a dimension or equation.
Control how geometric constraints are handled by 3D grip actions.
■ Never Break – Use this setting to prevent grip editing of a feature controlled by a
constraint.
■
Always Break – Use this setting to allow grip editing of a feature regardless of constraints.
■ Prompt – Use this setting to receive a prompt giving you the option to always break when
grip editing a feature controlled with a constraint.

Restrictions for Using 3D Grips

Be aware of the following issues when editing with 3D Grips:
■
When you modify a part from within an assembly environment, the model geometry is modified
and saved within the individual part file.
■ The 3D Grips tool can adjust only face geometry that is created from an extruded, revolved, or
swept feature. Because the part file is manipulated, 3D Grips is not available for assembly-level
features.
■
Extruded and revolved features have grips positioned on the faces and the edges of the feature.
For face grip editing, you can grip edit only the faces that are not in the plane of the original sketch.
■ A sweep feature has grips available only for manipulating the profile sketch.
■ When your 3D Grip options are set to allow it, during grip editing, any dimensional constraint is
ignored and manipulated as if it were a reference dimension. When you finish the grip edit, the
dimension value is updated to reflect the new distance or angle.
■
You can select and change the value of any dimension that is displayed during a 3D grip edit in the
same way that you can with the Edit Sketch command.

196 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

 Dimensions with Formulas
If a 3D grip edit changes the value for a parametric dimension and that parametric dimension
contained a formula prior to the edit, the formula will be replaced by the exact measurement
value.

Editing with the 3D Grips Tool

You can edit 3D grips dynamically, by specifying a distance or angle, or by selecting another edge or
face to align to.

Procedure: Grip Editing Dynamically

The following procedure shows how to access the 3D Grips tool and edit a feature or face dynamically.

1. Right-click the feature, face, or sketch to be edited. Click 3D Grips.

2. Place the cursor over the desired grip circle to display a vector normal arrow or edge line. Left-
click and drag the arrow or line indicator the desired distance.
3. Continue to select and edit additional grips as required. Right-click anywhere in the graphics
window. Click Done.

Procedure: Grip Editing a Specific Distance or Angle

The following procedure shows how to use 3D Grips to adjust geometry by a specific distance or
angle.

1. Right-click the feature, face, or sketch to be edited. Click 3D Grips.

2. Place the cursor over the grip circle of the face to edit, so the vector normal arrow is displayed.
Right-click the arrow. Click Edit Dimension, Edit Offset, or Edit Extent.
3. In the appropriate dialog box, change the numeric value.
4. Right-click the feature, face, or sketch. Click Done.

Procedure: Grip Editing to Selected Geometry

The following procedure shows how to use 3D Grips to adjust geometry to an existing edge, face,
or vertex.

1. Right-click the feature, face, or sketch to be edited. Click 3D Grips.

2. Place the cursor over the desired grip circle, so a vector normal arrow or edge line is displayed.
Left-click the arrow or edge line.
3. Click on the vertex, edge, or face of the geometry to align with.
4. The feature preview is updated to reflect the new position.
5. Right-click the feature, face, or sketch. Click Done.

Lesson: 3D Grip Editing ■ 197

Exercise: Edit with 3D Grips
In this exercise, you use the 3D Grips tool to
2. Set selection priority to Faces and Edges.
dynamically lengthen the ends of a wrench, adjust
■ On the Standard toolbar, click Select >
their width a set distance, and adjust the opening in
the handle so that it aligns with other geometry. Select Faces and Edges.
■
Select the face on the top of the wrench
head.

3. Right-click the wrench head. Click 3D Grips.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen 4. Notice the dimensional equation
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
fx:d3 = d2 / 3 ul in the top illustration. As you
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Edit with
grip edit the part, because of the equation,
3D Grips. the entire part changes shape. Right-click
anywhere in the graphics window. Click
Cancel.

1. Open the file AlignmentWrench.iam.

198 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

5. Change a 3D grip setting: 9. In the Edit Offset dialog box, for Edit Offset
■
Distance, enter 15 mm. Click OK.
Click Tools menu > Application Options.
■
Click the Part tab.
■
Under 3D Grips, for Dimensional
Constraints, select Always Relax.
■
Click OK.
6. Repeat step 3 to start 3D Grips editing again.
7. Click and drag the face grip for the end of the
wrench head to lengthen it to approximately
30 mm.

10. Right-click in the graphics window.

Click Done to accept your edits.

8. Move a face a specific distance:

■
Position the cursor over the right-side
face grip and the subsequently displayed
arrow. 11. Set your selection priority to Features and
■
select a feature:
Right-click the grip arrow.
■
■ Click Edit Offset. SHIFT+right-click anywhere in the
graphics window. Click Feature Priority.
■
Select the open slot in the handle.
■
Right-click the selected feature.
Click 3D Grips.

Lesson: 3D Grip Editing ■ 199

12. Click the side-face grip arrow (1). Click the
straight left edge of the handle (2).

13. Right-click in the graphics window.

Click Done.

14. The slot is increased. Close all files without

saving.

200 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Lesson: Creating Work Features

Overview
In this lesson, you learn to create and use work planes, work axes, and work points. You use these work
features to assist in creating geometry, placing constraints, and completing other modeling tasks.
The construction of most part models requires the use of work features to complete. The more
complex your parts, the more work features you will likely use while creating it.
The following illustration shows how work planes, axes, and points are displayed in your parts.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■ Locate, display, and use the default work features and create new work features on a part.
■
Use the Work Plane tool to create work planes on a part.
■
Use the Work Axis tool to create work axes on a part.
■ Use the Work Point tool to create work points on a part.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 201

About Work Features
Every part contains a default set of work planes, work axes, and a center point. These default work
features are located in the Origin folder of the Part browser. You use these default work features to
define the initial orientation of your part design. You can use these default objects for the basis of new
sketches, for feature termination options, and as the basis for creating new work features. As your part
design progresses, you may need to create additional work plane, work axis, and work point features
that are based on faces, edges, and vertices of your part.
The following illustration shows the default work planes, axes, and center point located in the Origin
folder of the browser.

Definition of Default Work Features

There are three default work planes, each representing a different coordinate plane. The three planes
represented are the YZ plane, XZ plane, and XY plane. There are three default work axes, each
representing a different coordinate axis. The three axes represented are the X axis, Y axis, and Z axis.
There is a single Center Point work point, it represents the 0,0,0 coordinate. Work planes and work axes
extend outward from this point.
When you create a new part file, the initial sketch is created on one of these default planes. You can
create additional sketches or features using the model or the default work planes.
The following illustration shows the three default work planes and the center point.

202 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

The following illustration shows the three default work axes and the center point.

The default planes are not visible when starting a new part file. You can control their visibility in the
browser. The following illustration shows all of the default work features selected in the browser.
By clicking on Visibility, they will all become visible in the drawing.

Parametric Work Features

You create and use work features when physical geometry does not exist on the part for a specific task.
For example, as you develop your part design, you typically orient sketches for your features on
existing planar faces of the part. When a planar face does not exist, you can create one or more work
features to define and orient a plane for that sketch.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 203

 Example of Parametric Work Features
In the following illustration, two work axes were used to create a centerline work plane. This work
plane is then used to create a sketched feature on the end of the part.

Browser Appearance of Parametric Work Features

The following illustration shows how work features are displayed in the browser.

204 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Work Feature Appearance
The appearance of work features is controlled in several different ways. You can turn on or turn off the
appearance of work features individually or globally. To turn off the visibility of a single work feature,
right-click it in the browser, and click Visibility.

Controlling Global Visibility

Click View menu > Object Visibility to turn the visibility of work features and sketches on and off, as
shown in the following image. Select the appropriate option. You can also use the keyboard shortcuts.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 205

Creating Work Planes
You use the Work Plane tool to create work planes in the current part. Work planes are used to define
planar surfaces when the existing geometry does not represent the required plane. When you create
work planes, you select geometry and/or other work features. Each selection defines either orientation
or position for the new work plane. Work planes are parametrically attached to the model geometry
or default work planes. When you create a work plane using features of existing geometry, if the
geometry changes, the work plane also changes. For example, if you create a work plane that is
tangent to a cylindrical surface with a radius of 2 mm, and that radius later changes to 5 mm, the work
plane moves to retain the tangent relationship with the cylinder.

Uses for Work Planes

The following list summarizes some potential uses for work planes:
■
Basis for new sketches
■ Feature termination options
■
Basis for new work features

In the following illustration, the work plane (1) is created at a 30-degree angle from a part face. The
circular extrusion (2) is created from the work plane extruding to meet the part face. As the angle of
the part face changes, the work plane updates to maintain the 30-degree angle, and the circular
feature changes with the work plane.

Access

Work Plane

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: ]

206 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Creating Work Planes: Process Overview
When you create work planes, the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select.
For example, there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. All work planes are created
based on two or three selections. Each selection represents either an orientation or position.
Follow these steps to create a work plane that is aligned with the Origin XY plane and tangent to the
outside of the cylinder.

1. Select the feature or plane.

2. Select the second feature or plane.

The resulting work plane is created.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 207

 Procedures: Creating Work Planes
When you create work planes, the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select.
For example, there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. All work planes are created
based on two or three selections. Each selection represents either an orientation or position.
Use the following approaches to create work planes.

Aligned to Origin Plane/Tangent to Cylindrical Surface

Selection 1 – Selection 2 – Result

Origin Work Plane Cylindrical Feature

Aligned to Face/Midpoint Between Two Faces

Selection 1 – Part Face Selection 2 – Part Face Result

Offset from Plane or Surface

Selection 1 – Click and drag Selection 2 – Release the Result

from plane or surface mouse and enter an offset
distance

208 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Angle from Face/Along an Edge

Selection 1 – Selection 2 – Result

Edge on Part Planar Surface on Part,
Enter Angle

Work Plane on Three Points

Selection 1 – Vertex on Geometry Selection 2 – Vertex on Geometry

Selection 3 – Vertex on Geometry Result

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 209

 Parallel to Face/Midpoint of Edge

Selection 1 – Plane/Face Selection 2 – Midpoint of Edge Result

Procedure: Resizing Work Planes

Place your cursor over the corner of the work plane. When the resize indicator appears, click and drag
the corner of the work plane to resize it.

Procedure: Moving Work Planes

Place your cursor over an edge of the work plane. When the move indicator appears, click and drag
the work plane to a new location within that same plane. In the following illustration, the move
indicator is displayed (1) and the work plane is moved to a new location (2).

210 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Creating Work Axes
The Work Axis tool is used to create work axes in the current part. Work axes are used to define an axis
when the existing geometry does not represent the required axis. Work axes are parametrically
attached to the model geometry and/or default work features. When you create a work axis using
features of existing geometry, if the geometry changes, the work axis updates to reflect those
changes.

Uses for Work Axes

The following are some potential uses for work axes:
■
Axis of revolution for circular pattern
■ Basis for new work features
■
Representation of centerlines on sketches

Access

Work Axis

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: /

Procedure: Creating Work Axes

When you create a work axis, the type of work axis is based completely on the geometry you select.
For example, there is no dialog box to create an axis at the intersection of two planes. All work axes are
created by selecting existing geometric features or other work features. Follow these steps to create a
work axis.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 211

 Procedures: Creating Work Axes
Use the following approaches to create work axes.

Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature

Selection 1 – Circular Feature Result

Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes

Selection 1 – Selection 2 – Result

Plane or Planar Surface Plane or Planar Surface

Work Axis Through Point/Normal to Plane

Selection 1 – Plane or Planar Selection 2 – Point Result

Surface

212 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

 Work Axis Through Two Points

Selection 1 – Point or Midpoint Selection 2 – Point or Midpoint Result

Creating Work Points

You use the Work Point tool to create parametric construction points on part features. Several
methods are available for creating these work points. Each method creates a work point that is
parametrically attached to the geometry or other work features. If this geometry changes, the work
point changes accordingly.
Work points are used as construction geometry to assist in the creation of other geometry and
features.
Grounded Work Points are fixed in space and have no association to other geometry. In part files, you
place grounded work points at vertex points on the part. Once placed, you can modify the point using
options found on the short cut menu.

Uses for Work Points

The following are some potential uses for work points:
■
Projection onto sketches.
■
Basis for new work features.
■ Creation of 3D sketches by drawing lines between work points.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 213

 Access

Work Point

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: .

Access

Grounded Work Point

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: ;

Procedures: Creating Work Points

Use the following approaches to create work points.

Creating a Work Point on a Vertex

1. On the panel bar, click the Work Point tool and select a vertex on the part.

214 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

2. The work point is created on the selected vertex.

Creating a Work Point at the Midpoint of an Edge

1. On the panel bar, click the Work Point tool and select the midpoint of an edge.

2. The work point is created on the midpoint of the selected edge.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 215

 Creating a Work Point at the Intersection of an Edge and Plane

1. On the panel bar, click the Work Point tool and select an edge or axis.

2. Select a plane or surface.

3. The work point is created at the intersection of the edge and plane.

216 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Work Point at the Intersection of a Line or Axis and a Surface

Selection 1 – Line or Axis Selection 2 – Surface Result

Work Point at the Intersection of a Plane and a Curve

Selection 1 – Plane or Face Selection 2 – Curve Result

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 217

Exercise: Create Work Planes
In this exercise, you create a cylindrical control valve
using both origin planes and work planes.

The completed exercise 3. Mirror the new feature to the other side.
■ On the panel bar, click the Mirror tool.
■
Select the Extrusion2 feature.
Completing the Exercise
■
Click the Mirror Plane button.
To complete the exercise, follow the
■ Select the YZ origin plane as shown here.
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters Click OK.
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create Work
Planes.

1. Open Control-Valve.ipt.
2. Turn on the visibility of the default YZ plane.
■
In the browser, expand the Origin folder.
■
Right-click YZ Plane.
■ Click Visibility.

218 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

4. In the graphics window, right-click the work 6. Create an offset plane to the plane just
plane. Click Visibility on the shortcut menu to created.
turn off the work plane visibility. ■
On the panel bar, click the Work Plane
tool.
■ Click and drag the work plane just
created.
■
In the Offset dialog box, enter 10.00 mm
and click the green check mark.

5. Create a new work plane tangent to the top of

your part and parallel to the XY plane.
■
On the panel bar, click the Work Plane
tool.
■ In the browser, select XY Plane.
■
Select the top of the cylinder as shown
here. 7. Turn off the visibility of Work Plane1.
■
In the graphics window, right-click Work
Plane1.
■ Click Visibility on the shortcut menu to
turn off the work plane visibility.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 219

8. Create a new sketch using the offset work 14. Extrude the new sketch to create the feature.
plane. ■
On the panel bar, click the Extrude tool.
■
On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch ■
Select the profile as shown.
tool. ■ In the Extents list, select To Next. Click OK.
■
Select the work plane.

9. On the Standard toolbar, click the Look At

tool and select the work plane.
10. On the panel bar, click the Project Geometry
tool and project the edges indicated.

15. On the keyboard press ALT+] to toggle all

user work planes off.
11. Create a new sketch for an added feature.
■ Using standard sketching tools, sketch,
constrain, and dimension the geometry
as shown here.
■ Note the horizontal and vertical
constraints on the geometry midpoints.

12. Right-click in the graphics window. 16. Save and close all files.
Click Home View.
13. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the sketch.

220 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Exercise: Create Work Axes
In this exercise, you use work axes to add features to
2. Turn on the visibility of default work features.
an existing part. You utilize both origin work axes as
■
well as new work axes to create the additional In the browser, expand the origin folder.
features required for the part. ■ While holding down the CTRL key, select
X Axis, Z Axis, and Center Point.
■
Right-click one of the objects.
Click Visibility.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters 3. Activate an existing sketch using the browser.
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic ■
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create In the browser, expand Extrusion1.
■
Work Axes. Right-click Sketch1.
■
Click Edit Sketch.
4. Examine the sketch and dimensions. Notice
1. Open Control-Block-45.ipt. how the sketch is constrained and
dimensioned to origin features such as the
Center Point and Work Axes.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 221

5. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit 10. Create a hole using the projected sketch
the sketch. point.
■
6. Turn off Autoproject Edges for Sketch On the panel bar, click the Hole tool.
Creation. ■ The point projected from the origin work
■ Click Tools menu > Application Options. axis should be automatically selected. If
■
not, select the projected point.
In the Options dialog box, select the ■
Sketch tab. In the Termination list, select Through All.
■
■ Clear the check mark for Autoproject In the preview window of the Hole dialog
Edges for Sketch Creation and Edit. box, enter 7 mm.
■ Click OK.
■
Click OK.
7. Create a new sketch plane.
■
Right-click the face of the part.
■ On the shortcut menu, click New Sketch.

8. Project the default X axis to the new sketch

plane.
■
On the panel bar, click the Project
Geometry tool.
■
In the browser, select Origin X Axis.
■
Right-click in the graphics window.
Click Done.
9. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the sketch.

222 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

11. Create a new work axis using the center point 14. On the panel bar, click the Project Geometry
and a part face. tool. Select the work axis you created
■
previously.
On the panel bar, click the Work Axis tool.
■
In the browser, select the Origin Center
Point object.
■
Select the angled face of the part as
shown here.

15. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit

the sketch.
16. Create a new hole using the new projected
point.
■
On the panel bar, click the Hole tool.
■ The point projected from the work axis
should be automatically selected. If not,
select the projected point.
■ In the Termination list, select To. Select
12. Verify the display of the work axis. If your work
axis is not displayed, perform the following the inside face of the first hole you
steps. created.
■ In the preview window of the Hole dialog
■
In the browser, right-click Work Axis1.
■
box, enter 7 mm, if required.
Click Auto-Resize. Your axis resizes and
■
extends outside the part boundary. Click OK.

13. Right-click the angled face of the part.

Click New Sketch.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 223

17. In the browser, double-click Sketch1 to edit 19. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the sketch. the sketch. Notice the changes are applied to
all affected features including the work axis
and hole.

18. Edit the angle of the upper extrusion.

■
Double-click the 45-degree angle
dimension.
■
In the Edit Dimension dialog box enter
60 deg.
■ Click the green check mark. 20. Save and close all files.

224 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Exercise: Create Work Points
In this exercise, you create a PC speaker base
2. On the panel bar, click the Work Point tool.
component by using sketched features and work
Select the midpoint of the front edge of the
points. To save time, the sketch geometry has
Speaker-Base part.
already been created.

3. Create a new work plane using the point

projected previously.
The completed exercise ■
On the panel bar, click Work Plane.
■
In the browser, select Origin XY plane.
■ Select the Work Point1 feature previously
Completing the Exercise
created.
To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 3: Basic
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create Work
Points.

1. Open Speaker-Base.ipt.

4. On the Standard toolbar, click the Sketch tool.

Select the work plane previously created.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 225

5. On the panel bar, click the Project Geometry
tool. Select the work point as shown.

6. Sketch and dimension a circle from the

projected work point as shown here.

9. On the panel bar, click the Grounded Work

Point tool. In the browser, expand the Origin
folder and select the Center Point object.
10. Create a grounded work point offset up from
the Center Point object.
■ When the work point triad appears, select
the Z axis arrow as indicated.
■
Enter 25 mm for Z.
■ Click OK to create the work point.
7. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the sketch.
8. Extrude the sketch through all with a cut.
■
On the panel bar, click Extrude.
■
Select the circle profile.
■ In the Extrude dialog box, select the Cut
feature relationship button.
■
From the Extents list, select All.
■ Click the direction button as shown.
Click OK.

226 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

11. Create a new work plane parallel to the XY 14. Sketch and dimension a circle from the
plane and through the grounded work point. projected work point as shown here.
■
On the panel bar, click Work Plane.
■
In the browser, select the Origin XY plane.
■ Select the Work Point 2 that you just
created.

15. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit

the sketch.
16. Extrude the sketched circle to the main body.
■
On the panel bar, click Extrude.
12. In the graphics window, right-click the work ■
Select the circle profile.
plane just created. Click New Sketch.
■ From the Extents list, click To Next.

13. On the panel bar, click the Project Geometry

tool and select the work point.

Lesson: Creating Work Features ■ 227

17. Add a taper to the extrusion.
■
In the Extrude dialog box, click the
More tab.
■ For Taper, enter 5. Click OK.

18. On the keyboard, press ALT+] to turn off all

user work planes.
19. Save and close all files.

228 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes

Overview
This lesson describes how to create basic swept shapes using the Sweep tool. The Sweep tool
creates a sketched feature by sweeping a profile along a path.
When you need to create a shape that follows a predefined path, consider creating it as a
sweep feature.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Decide when to use a sweep feature.
■
Use the Sweep tool to create sweep features that follow 2D and 3D paths.
■ State the guidelines for creating sweeps.

Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes ■ 229

About Swept Shapes
A swept feature is similar to an extrude feature, except that instead of extruding the profile to a
specified or calculated distance, the profile is extruded or swept along a path. As the profile is swept
along the path, it maintains the same cross section as the original profile, unless you use the Taper
option. In that case, the taper angle is applied equally to all sides of the profile as it is swept along the
path.
Sweep features can be used as base features (the first feature on the part) or secondary features used
to cut, join, or intersect existing part geometry.
The following illustration shows the path sketch (2) and profile sketch (1) before and after executing
the Sweep tool (3).

Definition of Sweep Features

You use sweep to create any nonlinear or nonperpendicular extrusions. Extrude always creates a
feature that is perpendicular to the sketch plane. With sweep, you can define the extrusion path that
is not perpendicular to the sketch plane, and the path can be 2D or 3D.

230 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

 Example of a Sweep Feature
Many housings require a ledge around them to produce a seal with a lid that is made to cover the
container in some way. The following illustration shows how a sweep feature produced the ledge on
this simple housing.

Creating Sweep Features

The process of creating a sweep feature is similar to using other sketched features, in that you must
have a sketch profile. Where the sweep feature differs is that you must also have a sketched path for
it to follow. Therefore, in order to create a sweep feature, you must have two unconsumed sketches,
one for the path and one for the profile. The path can consist of lines, splines, and other sketch
geometry, or it can be created using 3D sketch tools such as lines, splines, and bends.

Access

Sweep

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL+SHIFT+S

Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes ■ 231

 Sweep Dialog Box
Use the Sweep dialog box to select the profile and path geometry and adjust the output options for
the sweep feature.

The following features and options are available in the Sweep dialog box:

Profile Click this button to select one or more profiles to sweep along the selected
path. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the
sweep feature.
Path Click this button to select the path along which the profile is swept. A red
arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the extrusion
feature.
Output Specify the desired output option, Solid or Surface.
Operation Select the appropriate icon for a join, cut, or intersect operation.
Sweep Type Select from the following types of Sweeps:
■
Path – Create a sweep feature by sweeping a profile along a path.
■
Path & Guide Rail – Create a sweep feature by sweeping a profile
along a path. The guide rail controls scale and twist of the swept
profile.
■
Path & Guide Surface – Create a sweep feature by sweeping a profile
along a path. The guide surface controls the twist of the swept profile.
Orientation Path holds the swept profile constant to the sweep path while Parallel
holds the swept profile parallel to the original profile.
Taper Sets taper angle for sweeps normal to the sketch plane. The taper is not
available for parallel orientation.
Optimize for Automatically advances to next selection after a single selection is made.
Single Selection Clear the check mark to make multiple selections.
Preview Toggles the Preview feature on and off.

232 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Procedure: Creating a Workplane Normal to a Path
The following steps describe how to create a work plane normal to a sketch path. The work plane can
then be used to create a sketch profile that will be swept along the path.

1. Start by creating a sketch to use as the path for your sweep feature.

2. Start the Work Plane tool and select your path sketch as shown.

3. Select the point at the end of your sketched path as shown.

Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes ■ 233

 4. Create a new sketch on the work plane just created.

5. Sketch and constrain a profile for the sweep.

6. Create your sweep feature using the profile and path sketches.

Procedure: Creating Sweep Features

The following steps describe how to create sweep features.

1. Create and constrain the sketch geometry used for the path.

234 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

2. Create a new sketch, then create and constrain the geometry to be used for the profile. In the
following illustration, a work plane was created that is coincident to the endpoint of the path
and normal to the path. The work plane was then used to align the new sketch for the profile.
This method ensures that the profile is normal to the path.

3. On the panel bar, click the Sweep tool and select the profile geometry. Click the Path button
and select the path geometry.

4. If necessary, adjust the operation options for join, cut, or intersect. Optionally, enter a taper
angle for the sweep feature.
5. The sweep feature is created according to the settings that you specified in the Sweep
dialog box.

Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes ■ 235

Guidelines for Creating Swept Shapes
There are several ways to create sweep features. Your path sketch can be either open or closed, and it
can be either a 2D or 3D sketch. Your profile must be closed if creating a solid, but can be open if
creating a surface. While it is not mandatory, creating your path and profile on perpendicular planes
produces the best results.
Follow these guidelines for successful sweeps.
■
Your path can be an open or closed loop, but it must pierce the profile plane.
■
You must have two unconsumed sketches, the profile and path, to create a sweep.
■ If Preview is enabled and the preview does not appear, it is likely that the sweep feature will not be
created.
■
Remember to avoid creating a profile that would self intersect when being swept along a path
containing a bend.
■
The taper creates sweeps normal to the sketch plane and is not available for parallel sweeps or
closed paths.
■ A positive taper angle increases the profile cross section while a negative angle decreases as the
sweep moves away from the start point.
■
Use a guide rail or guide surface to control twist and scale of the swept profile.
■
An open profile cannot be used to create a solid base feature.

Example of a Sweep Feature

When creating a base feature sweep, it may be a good idea to use the default work planes for your
path and profile sketches. In the following illustration, the path was created using the default XY plane,
and the profile was created using the default ZX plane.

236 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Relationship Between Path and Profile
When you create path and profile geometry, keep in mind that some items are optional, while others
are crucial to achieving the desired results.

Intersecting Path and Profile

When you create a sweep feature, if the path and profile do not intersect, the following message is
displayed. If you click Yes to continue, the application attempts to create the sweep. However,
depending on the position of the profile and path, if errors do occur they can be difficult to diagnose.

Radius of Bends in Path

If the path includes bends, you must consider the radius of the bend compared to the farthest point
on the profile from the path. As the profile is swept along the path, when it encounters a bend, if the
radius is too tight, the swept geometry intersects itself as it changes direction. In that case, a message
similar to the following is displayed.

The following illustration is an example of an incorrect positional relationship between the profile (2)
and the path (1). Notice that the bend dimension (3) of 2 mm is less than the farthest distance (4) of
the profile from the path. As the profile changes directions at the location of the bend, the resulting
inside radius would be less than zero, and the geometry would be self-intersecting.

To correct this problem, the profile dimension would have to be less than or equal to the bend
dimension. You can accomplish this by changing either the profile dimension or the bend dimension.

Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes ■ 237

Exercise: Create Sweep Features
In this exercise, you use the Sweep tool to add a
2. Right-click the top face of the part.
swept shape on the AirBox2 component to allow the
Click New Sketch.
AirBox Lid component to seal. Instead of creating
new geometry for the path, you use existing
geometry on the part.

3. If the edges of the face are not automatically

projected, use the Project Geometry tool to
project the outside edges. These edges will
be used as the path for the sweep profile.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of
chapters and exercises, click Chapter 3:
Basic Shape Design. Click Exercise:
Create Sweep Features. 4. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the sketch.

1. Open Air-Box-2.ipt.

238 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

5. Create a work plane using an edge and a 7. On the panel bar, click the Project Geometry
point. tool and select the edge, as shown. This
■
action creates a point that can be used to
On the panel bar, click the Work Plane
constrain your new geometry.
tool and select the edge (1) of the AirBox2
part.
■
Select the endpoint of the edge (2), as
shown.

8. Using standard sketching tools, sketch and

constrain the geometry, as shown.

6. Right-click the work plane. Click New Sketch.

9. On the Standard toolbar, click the Return

button to exit the sketch.

Lesson: Creating Basic Swept Shapes ■ 239

10. Create a sweep using the path and profile just
created.
■
On the panel bar, click the Sweep tool and
select the profile that you created
previously.
■
For the path, select the outer edge of the
part and click OK.

11. Notice that the profile is swept around the

entire part.

12. Save and close all files.

240 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design

Chapter Summary

This chapter presented the tools and recommended workflows for basic shape design. Using these
techniques, you can now create more complex 2D sketches at different locations on your part,
combine multiple 3D features to create various shapes, and modify those shapes at any time during
the design process.
Having completed this chapter, you can:
■
Create features using the Extrude and Revolve tools.
■ Use reference and construction geometry.
■
Use the browser and shortcut menus to edit parametric parts.
■
Use the 3D Grips tool to edit part geometry in the context of an assembly and in a
stand-alone part.
■
Create, locate, and utilize work features to perform modeling tasks.
■
Create swept shapes by sweeping a profile along a 2D or 3D path.

Chapter Summary ■ 241

242 ■ Chapter 3: Basic Shape Design
 Chapter

4
Detailed Shape Design Chapter4:

This chapter enhances your basic part modeling skills by providing additional tools and
recommended workflows for detailed shape design. Common industry practice dictates the use
of chamfers and fillets to break sharp corners and relieve stress. Holes and threaded features
often must be added for fasteners. Some parts, such as stampings or molds, must be designed as
thin-walled shapes. Additionally, most parts include some shapes or features that are patterned
or mirrored.
The lessons in this chapter cover the tools required to meet each of these design requirements.

Objectives
After completing this chapter, you will be able to:
■ Create both chamfers and fillets on a part.
■
Use the Hole and Thread tools to place hole and thread features on your part model.
■
Create rectangular and circular patterns and mirror existing features.
■ Create thin-walled parts using the Shell tool.

243
Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets

This lesson describes how to create both chamfers and fillets on your part. Fillets are commonly used
on a part to reduce the potential of stress cracking, and for aesthetic reasons. Chamfers are used for
angled faces, relief clearance, and also for aesthetic purposes.
Chamfer and fillet features are standard on most manufactured components and are among the most
widely used placed features on any 3D part.
The following illustration shows a part where all sharp edges have been replaced with fillet or chamfer
features.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe the difference between chamfers and fillets and give an example of how they are used.
■ Use the Chamfer tool to create chamfers.
■
Use the Fillet tool to create constant radius fillets.
■
State the guidelines for creating chamfers and fillets.

244 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

About Chamfers and Fillets
A fillet creates a radius edge on an interior or exterior corner of your part, whereas a chamfer bevels
an edge. Cast and molded parts rarely have true sharp edges. Chamfer and fillet features are applied
to almost all the edges of your part designs. When completing a machined part on the shop floor, you
always remove all sharp edges. You also apply this same principle to your parametric part designs.
The following illustration shows a cast part with fillets and rounds on edges and then chamfers placed
on the holes to represent the machining process.

Definition of Fillets
A fillet is defined by a single constant radius, or in the case of a variable radius fillet, by more than one
radius. Consider a fillet to be an interior shape, placed between faces of less than 180 degrees, which
adds material to your part. A round is an exterior shape placed between faces of any angle, which
removes material from your part when created.

Fillet
Round
Full round

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets ■ 245

 Definition of Chamfers
A chamfer is defined using equal distances, a distance and an angle, or two different distance values.
Chamfers are used to break sharp edges and as lead-ins on holes or bosses. Most angles faces in
parametric parts are created using chamfers.

Distance
Distance and Angle
Two Distances

Example of Using Chamfer for a Lead-in

In most circumstances, placing a fastener into a hole is aided through the use of a chamfer. In the
following illustration, it is easier to assemble the parts on the right that have a chamfer used as a
lead-in.

246 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Creating Chamfers
You use the Chamfer tool to add chamfer features to edges on your part. These features, like other
features, are fully parametric and easily editable after you create them. When you create chamfer
features, you can choose from three different methods which determine how the chamfer is specified.
With any of the methods, the end result is the replacement of the selected edge(s) with a face(s) at an
angle specified either directly or indirectly through the use of distances.
The following illustration shows a part before and after adding chamfer features.

Access

Chamfer

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL+SHIFT+K

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets ■ 247

 Chamfer Dialog Box
The Chamfer dialog box is displayed when you start the Chamfer tool.

Distance Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is applied to both
sides of the selected edge, resulting in a 45-degree chamfer.
Distance and Angle Select a face adjacent to the edge you are chamfering. The angle is
measured from this face. Select the edge(s) to be chamfered. This
option is disabled until you select a face. The edge(s) selected must
be adjacent to the selected face. Specify a distance for the chamfer.
The distance is measured from the selected edge along the selected
face. Enter an angle for the chamfer. The angle is measured from the
selected face.
Two Distances Select the edge to be chamfered. When you use this method, only
one edge can be chamfered at a time. Specify the first distance of the
chamfer. This distance is measured along one of the adjacent faces.
Specify the second distance of the chamfer. This distance is
measured along the opposite adjacent face.

248 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Procedure: Creating Chamfers
The following steps describe how to create chamfer features.

1. On the panel bar, click the Chamfer tool.

2. In the Chamfer dialog box, select the
desired method to create the chamfer.
■ For a single distance chamfer, select
the edge(s) to be chamfered. Enter a
distance for the chamfer.

The resulting chamfer is created.

■ For the distance and angle method,

select the Distance and Angle
option. Select the face, and then
select the edge(s) to be chamfered.
Enter a distance and angle for the
chamfer.

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets ■ 249

 The resulting chamfer is created.

■
For the two distances method,
select the Two Distances option.
Select the edge to be chamfered.
Enter distance values in the
Distance1 and Distance2 fields.

■
Click OK to create the chamfer.
The resulting chamfer is created.

250 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Creating Fillets
You use the Fillet tool to create fillets and rounds on existing 3D geometry. You can create both
constant radius and variable radius fillets with the Fillet tool.
The following illustration shows a block before and after adding fillet features.

Access

Fillet

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: F

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets ■ 251

 Constant Radius Fillet Options
The Fillet dialog box is displayed when you start the Fillet tool.

The following creation methods and options are available in the Fillet dialog box.

Edge Adds fillets or rounds to one or more edges of a part. All fillets and rounds
created in a single operation become a single feature.
Face Adds fillets or rounds between two selected face sets. The face sets do not
need to share an edge.
Full Round Adds fillets or rounds that are tangent to three adjacent faces. The center
face is replaced by the fillet.
Select Mode Mode selection enables easy selection of objects to fillet. Select Edge for
edge selection priority; Loop for face selection priority; and Feature for
feature priority selection.
Options Use the All Fillets or All Rounds check boxes to quickly select all fillet edges
or all round edges on the part. Select them both to have all edges on the part
selected.

252 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Procedure: Creating Constant Radius Fillets
Follow these steps to create constant radius fillet features.

1. On the panel bar, click the Fillet tool.

2. With the Fillet dialog box displayed, in the graphics window, select the edges to be filleted and
specify a radius for each edge set. Create an edge set for each different radius. In the following
illustration, two edge sets have been created. The first edge set contains two edges to receive
a 2 mm fillet, and the second set contains three edges to receive a 1 mm fillet.

3. Click OK to create the fillet feature. Notice that in the browser only one fillet feature is
displayed even though five edges were filleted in this example.

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets ■ 253

Guidelines for Creating Chamfers and Fillets
Although both fillets and chamfers are relatively simple shapes, they are often a challenge to create
with consistency where multiple edges intersect. Following the guidelines presented here can
improve your success in creating these features.
■
Avoid creating all of your fillets and chamfers with a single feature. You will have greater success
creating and changing features with less edges selected.
■
Create these features on parallel edges of a part first. When you create additional features, you can
select the resulting face to complete the remaining edges at the same time.
■ Remember that using the Two Distances option with the Chamfer tool limits you to creating the
feature on one edge at a time.
■
Pressing CTRL while clicking removes geometry from the selection.
■ Because fillets and chamfers are considered finish features, consider creating them toward the end
of the design process after all other features have been defined.
■
Avoid including fillets and chamfers in your sketch geometry and instead create them as part
features.

Example of Creating Separate Features

In the following example, by creating your side fillets first, you can select the continuously tangent
edge as a single selection rather than having to select all the edges individually. Creating your fillet
features in this way gives you more flexibility for possible changes to the part later.

254 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Exercise: Create Chamfers
In this exercise, you add chamfer features to an existing part.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 4: Detailed 3. Create a 1.0 mm chamfer on the inside edge
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create of the two small holes.
Chamfers.
■
Restart the Chamfer tool.
■ Select the inside edges of the smaller
holes.
1. Open Rod-Bearing-Mount.ipt. ■
For Distance enter 1.0 mm. Click OK.

2. Create a chamfer on the inside edge of the

large hole.
■
On the panel bar, click Chamfer.
■
Select the inside edge of the large hole.
■ For Distance, enter 1.5 mm and click OK.

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets ■ 255

4. Create a chamfer around the top surface of 6. Add a chamfer to the base of the two small
the part. bosses.
■ ■
Restart the Chamfer tool. In the Chamfer Restart the Chamfer tool. Click the
dialog box, click the Distance and Angle Distance and Angle method.
option. ■
Select the top face of the part (1). Select
■
Select the side face of part (1). Select the the two edges of the smaller bosses (2).
top edge of the part (2). ■ For Distance enter 1.0 mm. For Angle
■
For Distance enter 1.5mm. For Angle enter 60 deg. Click OK.
enter 30 deg. Click OK.

5. Add a chamfer between the cylinder and

main face.
■ Restart the Chamfer tool. Click the Two 7. Save and close all files.
Distances method.
■
Select the edge labeled (1) in the
following illustration.
■
For Distance1 enter 1.5 mm.
For Distance2 enter 2.5 mm.
■ Click OK.

256 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Exercise: Create Fillets
In this exercise, you create constant radius fillets on ■
Click the Click To Add option and create a
an existing part.
second edge set by selecting the
geometry labeled (2). For Radius, enter
4 mm.
■
Click OK to create the feature.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 4: Detailed
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create
Fillets.
3. Repeat the previous steps to create the same
fillets on the opposite side of the part.
■ On the ViewCube, click the top-left corner
1. Open Pillow-Block-Rev-2.ipt.
to rotate the view to as shown.
■
On the keyboard, press F and create the
same fillet feature as in step 2.

2. Create fillets from two edge sets on one end

of the part.
■
On the panel bar, click the Fillet tool.
■
Select the geometry labeled (1). For
Radius, enter 2 mm.

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets ■ 257

4. Create a fillet on the top edges.
■
Click the Fillet tool.
■
Select the two edges along the top of the
part as shown in the following
illustration.
■
For the Radius, enter 20 mm. Click OK.

6. Create fillets on the remaining edges.

■
Click the Fillet tool and select the edges
shown here.
■ For the Radius enter 4 mm. Click OK.

5. Create a fillet along each edge.

■
Start the Fillet tool.
■
Select the edges as shown in the
following illustration. Notice that a single
pick selects all the curves on a side, due to
the fillet created on the top face in the
previous step.
■
Set the Radius to 4 mm. Click OK.

258 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

7. Create the same fillet features on the
opposite side of the part as you did in the
previous step.

8. Save and close all files.

Lesson: Creating Chamfers and Fillets ■ 259

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads

This lesson describes how to use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features and the Thread tool
to create threads on existing model features. You use hole features to create parametric holes on
parts. Although hole features are considered to be placed features, you can use unconsumed sketch
geometry to represent the center point locations for the holes.
The most common method of joining two or more components together is with threaded fasteners.
You should master the use of both the hole and thread features to produce the best models possible.
The following illustration shows a part that contains a combination of hole and thread features.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■ Define a hole feature.
■
Use the Hole tool to create holes on your part.
■
Use the Thread tool to create external thread features.

260 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

About Hole Features
Hole features are parametrically created features that are placed on existing part geometry. You can
create hole features with a number of different options, such as counterbore, countersink, flat bottom,
spotface, threads, tapered threads, and fastener clearances.
The following illustration shows a part with various types of holes. The enlarged view (1) shows the
bitmap thread representation.

Definition of Parametric Holes

There are many different ways to fasten parts together and most require a hole. Although you can
create holes by extruding a circle with a cut operation, the Hole tool provides greater flexibility in the
variations and types of holes that you can create, such as counterbore, countersink, and threads. Using
the Hole tool, you can create the various hole types in a single dialog box, rather than having to
manually edit or create geometry.
A primary benefit of using the Hole tool is the ability to annotate holes in the drawing environment
with the Hole Note and Hole Chart tools. A sample of the automatic hole note callout is shown in the
following illustration.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 261

 Example of Fastening Parts
Two metal components are often fastened together using a socket head cap screw. The following
illustration shows the clearance hole for the screw in one part and the threaded hole in the
mating part.

Benefits of the Hole Tool

Benefits of using the Hole tool include the following:
■ You use a single tool to create holes with various options.
■
You can annotate holes created with the Hole tool in the drawing with the Hole Note and Hole
Chart tools.
■ You can determine hole size by specifying the fastener thread type or clearance.
■
Options such as the counterbore, countersink, and spotface enable you to add features in a single
operation.

262 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Creating Holes
When you use the Hole tool, different options are available for defining the location of the hole as well
as for the type of hole to be created. You can define hole locations based on sketch geometry or
existing planes, points, and edges on the part. You can create standard drilled holes, counterbored
holes, and countersunk holes. Additional options are available for the drill point and thread options.

Access

Hole

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: H

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 263

 Hole Dialog Box
The Hole dialog box is displayed when you start the Hole tool.

Hole Placement Options

You can use any of the following options in the Hole dialog box for placing a hole feature.

From Sketch
Select this option to create holes based on locations on a sketch. Hole locations can consist of Point/
Hole Center objects, endpoints of lines or curves, or centers of projected circular geometry.

The following option is available when you select From Sketch placement.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Centers Select the center points for the holes. Use this option to
create a series of identical holes with one feature.

264 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Linear
Select this option to position the hole relative to two selected edges.

The following options are available when you select Linear placement.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Face Select a face on the part to orient the hole.

Reference 1 Select a part edge as the first reference. A dimension is placed

from the selected edge to the center of the hole. The dimension
can be edited as a standard parametric dimension.

Reference 2 Select a part edge as the second reference. A dimension is placed

from the selected edge to the center of the hole.

Flip Side Select this option to position the hole on the opposite side of the
selected edge.

Concentric
Select this option to position the hole concentric to another circular part edge.

The following options are available when you select Concentric placement.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Plane Select a part face to orient the hole.

Concentric Select a circular edge or face to position the hole concentrically.

Reference

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 265

 On Point
Select this option to position the hole on a work point.

The following options are available when you select On Point placement.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Point Select a work point to position the hole.

Direction Select a plane, face, edge, or work axis to define the direction
of the hole. If you select a plane, the hole direction is normal
to the face or plane.

Hole Type and Size Options

You can use any of the following options in the Hole dialog box to define the type and size of the hole.

Hole Type
Use the following options to define a standard drilled hole, counterbore hole, spotface, or countersink
hole.

266 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Hole Parameters
Depending on the hole type selected, enter the hole parameters in each available field.

Drill Point
Select flat or angled drill point. If you select angled, either enter an angle for the drill point or accept
the default value.

Termination
Select the termination option for the hole from the drop-down list.

Option Description
Distance The depth of the hole is based on the distance that you entered in the hole
parameters area.
Through All The hole is created through the entire part, even if the part depth at the
location of the hole changes.
To Select a face or plane to calculate the depth of the hole.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 267

 Additional Hole Type Options
Use the additional hole type options to define a simple hole, tapped hole, or clearance hole.

Option Description
Creates a simple hole with no thread features.

Creates a tapped hole based on the thread designation and options entered in the
Threads area of the dialog box. The Threads area appears only when this option is
selected.

Creates a clearance hole based on the fastener selected. Available clearance options
are Close, Normal, and Loose. The Fastener area appears only when this option is
selected.

Creates an NPT tapped or Taper threaded hole based on the thread designation and
options entered in the Threads area of the dialog box.

268 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Procedure: Creating Hole Features Using the Linear Option
Follow these steps to create hole features using the Linear placement option of the Hole tool.

1. On the panel bar, click Hole

and select Linear from the
Placement list.

2. Select the face to orient the

top of the hole, then select two
reference edges to locate the
hole. The edges selected do
not need to be on the same
plane as the face selected.

3. Select each dimension and

enter its precise value in the
Edit Dimension dialog box.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 269

 4. Adjust the options in the Hole
dialog box, and then click
Apply to create the hole and
continue placing other holes.

Procedure: Creating Hole Features Using the Concentric Option

Follow these steps to create hole features by using the Concentric placement option of the Hole tool.

1. On the panel bar, click Hole and select Concentric

from the Placement list.

270 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

2. Select the plane or face (1) to orient the hole, then select
a curved surface (2) as the concentric reference.

3. Adjust the options in the Hole dialog box, then click

Apply to create the hole and continue placing other
hole features.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 271

 Procedure: Creating Hole Features Using the From Sketch Option
Follow these steps to create and edit holes using sketch geometry for the hole locations.

1. Create a new sketch that contains the center

point location for the hole features.

2. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit the

sketch.
3. On the panel bar, click Hole and select the From
Sketch placement option. If you use the Point/
Hole Center sketch object, the hole centers are
automatically selected. Adjust the options in
the dialog box depending on the type of hole
you need to create. Click OK to create the hole.

272 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Procedure: Creating Hole Features Using the On Point Option
Follow these steps to create hole features using the On Point placement option of the Hole tool.

1. Create a work point (1) at the location of the

hole.

2. On the panel bar, click Hole. Select On Point

from the Placement list and then select the
work point.

3. Select a face, edge, or axis to define the

direction of the hole. If you select a face or
plane, the direction is normal to the face or
plane.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 273

 4. Adjust the options in the Hole dialog box.
Click Apply to create the hole and continue
placing other holes, or click OK to create the
hole and end the process.

Creating Threads
Using the Thread tool, you can create thread features on external and internal surfaces. Many of the
options available for internal threads using the Hole tool are also available when you use the Thread
tool. Threads are considered a placed feature, so the Thread tool does not require an unconsumed
sketch. All that is required is existing cylindrical surfaces to apply the thread feature.
The following illustration shows external thread features (1).

About Thread Features

With the Thread tool, you can turn your cylindrical faces into threaded features. You should create
your cylindrical diameters to the nominal size of the thread. The Thread tool automatically selects the
correct thread for that diameter.
Your threaded features do not affect the mass property calculations. They do however work with the
Hole Note callout in the drawing environment.
While in most cases you use the Hole command to produce internal threads, on occasion you need to
use the Thread tool. This most often occurs when you produce an internal diameter with the Revolve
Feature tool. The model in the following illustration was produced with the Revolve tool. Both the
internal and external threads were produced using the Thread tool.

274 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Access

Thread

Panel Bar: Part Features

Thread Options
The Thread dialog box is displayed when you start the Thread tool.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 275

 The Location tab in the Thread dialog box includes the following options and specifications.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Face Click the icon to select the face(s) to apply thread
features.
Display in Model Select this option to display the thread bitmaps on
the model. If this option is not selected, the thread
feature is created but is not displayed on the
geometry.
Full Length Select this option to apply the thread feature to the
entire length of the selected face. When this option
is not selected, the next three following options
become available.
Flip Click this button to flip the direction of the thread
feature.
Length Specifies the length of the thread feature on the
selected face.

Offset Specifies the distance from the start face of the

thread feature.

276 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

The Specification tab in the Thread dialog box includes the following options and specifications.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Thread Type Select the required thread type.

Size The nominal thread size is automatically

selected based upon the diameter of the
selected face. Selecting a nominal size
other than the size automatically
selected may result in an error when you
click OK.
Designation Select the appropriate thread pitch from
the list.

Class Select the appropriate thread class from

the list.

Right or Left Select to designate your desired thread

Hand hand.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 277

 Procedure: Creating Thread Features
The following steps describe how to create external thread features using the Thread tool.

1. On the panel bar, click Thread and select a cylindrical face on the part. On the Location tab,
adjust the Thread Length options as required.

2. On the Specification tab, select the appropriate thread type and adjust the other settings as
required.

3. Click OK to create the thread feature. The thread feature is displayed on the model geometry
as well as in the browser. Just like with other parametric features, you can right-click the thread
feature and click Edit Feature to edit the feature using the same dialog box used in creating the
feature.

278 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Exercise: Create Holes and Threads
In this exercise, you use the Hole tool with multiple
2. Create a tapped hole on the part face.
placement options to create tapped, countersink,
■
counterbore, and clearance holes. You also use the On the panel bar, click the Hole tool.
Thread tool to create an internal and external thread. ■ In the Hole dialog box, select Linear from
the Placement list.
■
Click Face.

3. Select a location near the lower left corner on

the front planar face.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of
chapters and exercises, click Chapter 4:
Detailed Shape Design. Click Exercise:
Create Holes and Threads.

Create Holes
4. Select the left edge as Reference 1. Enter a
In this portion of the exercise, you use the Hole tool
distance of 4 mm to locate the hole.
with multiple placement options to create tapped
holes and a through hole using the On Point
placement option.

1. Open Hole_Thread_Features1.ipt.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 279

5. Select the bottom edge as Reference 2. Enter 7. Repeat the previous steps to create a similar
a distance of 4 mm to locate the hole. hole on the opposite side of the face.

6. Finish making your settings and create the

hole.
■
Specify that the hole is M6 x 1 tapped
with a 6 mm countersink and a depth of
10 mm.
■
8. In the Hole dialog box, select Concentric from
Click Apply to create the hole. the Placement list.

9. Select the top plane of the part that contains

the three small machined flanges.

280 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

10. Create an M6 x 1 tapped hole through the 12. In the browser, right-click Work Axis3.
flange. Click Visibility. Rotate your view as shown.
■
Select the circular edge of the machined
flange to set the concentric reference.
Holes can be placed concentric to a
circular edge or a cylindrical face.
■
Change the settings as needed to create
an M6x1 tapped hole through all.
■ Click Apply to create the hole.

13. Create a hole using the On Point option.

■
Press H to start the Hole tool.
■
In the Holes dialog box, select On Point
from the Placement list.

11. Repeat the previous steps to create two

additional holes on the remaining small
flanges. Close the Hole dialog box when
done.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 281

14. Select the point and specify direction for the Create Holes and Threads
On Point hole. In this portion of the exercise, you use the Hole tool
■
In the graphics window, select Work with multiple placement options to create
Point3. countersink, counterbore, and clearance holes. You
■
Select Work Axis3 to define the direction also use the Thread tool to create an internal and
of the hole. external thread.

Note: Planes, axes, and edges can be used to 1. Open Hole_Thread_Features2.ipt.

define the direction of a hole. If the hole is
previewed outside the part, it may be
necessary to click the Flip Direction tool.

2. Create a screw clearance hole.

■
Start Hole.
■
For Placement, select On Point.
15. Finish the On Point hole. ■ For Hole Type, select Clearance Hole.
■
Change the hole diameter to 4 mm.
■ Set Termination to Through All.
■
Click Apply to create the hole.
16. Close all files without saving.
3. In the graphics window, select Work Point2
on the large flange.

282 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

4. In the graphics window, select the face on 6. Repeat the previous steps to create a similar
which the point exists to define the hole hole for the large flange on the opposite side
direction. of the part. Click Done to exit the Hole
dialog box.

5. Complete the clearance hole as specified: 7. Add a thread feature to the underside of the
part. Rotate your view as necessary to select
■
Specify a loose fit clearance hole with the faces.
counterbores for a 6 mm Ansi Metric Hex
■
Head Cap Screw. The data used for On the panel bar, click the Thread tool.
clearance holes is stored in the ■ Select the outside face as shown.
Clearance.xls spreadsheet, located in the
Design Data folder of the Inventor
installation directory tree.
■
Click Apply.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 283

8. Make the specification settings for the thread. 10. Complete the thread by making the
■
specification settings.
In the Thread dialog box, click the
■
Specification tab. In the Thread dialog box, click the
■ Set Designation to M90x4. Click OK to Specification tab.
■
create the thread. Set the Designation to M30x2.5 and click
Left Hand.
■ Click OK to create the thread.

9. Create a thread on an internal feature.

■
Start the Thread tool. 11. Create a spotface threaded hole.
■ Select the inner face as shown. ■
Start the Hole tool, Linear placement.
■
Select the Sportface and Taper Thread
Hole options.
■
Select the face as shown.

284 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

12. To locate the hole: 14. To define the hole:
■ For the first linear reference, select an ■ Enter 12 for the spotface diameter.
edge along the front face. Enter 12. ■
Enter 1 for the spotface depth.
■
For the second linear reference, select the ■
Enter 15 for the drill depth.
top or bottom face. Enter 22.5.

15. Click OK to create the spotface taper thread

feature.

13. For the thread specification:

■
For thread type, select DIN Taper.
■ For size, select M5.

16. Close all files without saving.

Lesson: Creating Holes and Threads ■ 285

Lesson: Patterning and Mirroring Features

This lesson describes how to mirror features, and how to reuse existing features in rectangular and
circular patterns. Mirroring and patterning can save you time in creating the geometry, as well as in
editing the features when the design changes.
When you create patterns or mirror existing geometry, you reduce the need to manually draw and edit
these duplicate features.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Identify situations in which you should pattern or mirror part features instead of creating
new ones.
■
Use the Rectangular Pattern tool to create rectangular patterns.
■
Use the Circular Pattern tool to create circular patterns.
■ Use the Mirror tool to create symmetric features.

286 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

About Feature Reuse
Many designs require patterns of features or geometry that consist of features that are symmetric
about a given plane. Instead of creating these features independently, you can use the Pattern and
Mirror tools to populate your parts with existing features.

Definition of Patterns
You use patterns to duplicate existing geometry according to parameters that you specify. When you
create patterns, occurrences of the original features are created. You can create these occurrences in
a circular or a rectangular pattern. When you create these patterns, the occurrences are associative to
the original feature, so any changes in the original feature are automatically reflected in the pattern
occurrences.

Definition of Mirroring Part Features

Parts often include features that can be considered symmetric about a plane of symmetry to other
features on the part. You can use the Mirror tool to mirror this geometry.
In the following illustration, Rectangular (1) and Circular (2) patterns have been created based on
individual features.

Lesson: Patterning and Mirroring Features ■ 287

 Features That Can Be Reused
The following features can be patterned or mirrored:
■
Most sketched and placed features
■
Entire solids
■ Work features

Benefits of Reusing Features

Benefits associated with patterning and mirroring features include the following:
■
You need to create only one of the patterned or symmetric features.
■ Changes that you make to the original feature are automatically applied to the patterned or
mirrored features.

Appearance of Rectangular and Circular Patterns in the Browser

The way that patterns are displayed in the browser is different from the way that other features are
displayed. When you expand a rectangular or circular pattern, the difference is immediately apparent.
Any sketches used as a path, along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern, are
displayed under the pattern feature. Beneath that is an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the
pattern. The first Occurrence item represents the initial feature used in the pattern, followed by an
Occurrence item for each occurrence created.

Right-click an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected
occurrence. This option is not available on the first occurrence.

288 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Example of Mirrored Features
In the following illustration, the part consists of several features that are symmetric about a plane of
symmetry. The symmetry planes are identified, along with the features that have been mirrored about
them.

Symmetry Plane A
Features mirrored about Plane A
Symmetry Plane B
Features mirrored about Plane B

Lesson: Patterning and Mirroring Features ■ 289

Lesson: Creating Rectangular Patterns

You use the Rectangular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a rectangular pattern.
You can pattern a feature along one or two directions and/or paths, with options to control
feature spacing.

Access

Rectangular Pattern

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL+SHIFT+R

290 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Rectangular Pattern Dialog Box
The Rectangular Pattern dialog box is displayed when you start the Rectangular Pattern tool.

Pattern Type Options

The following pattern types are available in the Rectangular Pattern dialog box.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Individual Feature Click this button to pattern individual features.

Entire Solid Click this button to pattern the entire solid.

When the Pattern Individual Features button is selected, you have the following selection option.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Features Select one or more features to be patterned.

When the Pattern Entire Solid button is selected, you have the following selection option.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Include Work/ Select the work features to include in the pattern.
Surface Features

Lesson: Creating Rectangular Patterns ■ 291

 Direction Pattern Options
The following options are available in the Direction 1 and Direction 2 areas of the Rectangular Pattern
dialog box.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Path Click this button to pattern individual features. Select the
path for Direction 1. This can be the edge of a part or a 2D
sketch representing the path for the pattern. Click the Flip
button to flip the path direction.
Mid Plane Creates a pattern where the occurrences are distributed
on both sides of the original feature.
Count Enter the number of occurrences for the pattern. This
number includes the original feature.
Length Enter a value for the pattern distance. This value
represents either the total distance of the pattern or the
spacing between the features.
Method Specifies total distance of Direction column, spacing
between occurrences, or equally fitted to the length of the
selected curve.

Compute Options
The following options are available in the Compute area of the Rectangular Pattern dialog box.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Optimized For pattern occurrences of 50 or more, increases pattern
performance.
Identical With this method, each occurrence uses an identical
termination method, regardless of where it intersects
other features.
Adjust Enables each occurrence termination to be calculated.
This method requires more processing and can increase
computational time on large patterns.

292 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Orientation Pattern Options
The following options are available in the Orientation area of the Rectangular Pattern dialog box.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Identical Occurrence orientation is identical to that of the first
feature.
Adjust Specifies which direction controls the position of
Direction patterned features. Rotates each occurrence so that it
maintains its orientation to the 2D tangent vector of the
path.

Procedure: Creating an Optimized Rectangular Pattern

Follow these steps to create an optimized rectangular pattern.

1. Create a part with one or more features to be patterned.

2. On the panel bar, click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature to be patterned.
Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select a path, part edge, or origin axis for the
pattern. Enter the number of occurrences and distance values and adjust the spacing method
as necessary. Optionally include information for Direction 2, then click OK.

Lesson: Creating Rectangular Patterns ■ 293

 3. As soon as the total number of occurrences is equal to or greater than 50, you are prompted to
consider using the Optimized Compute option. Click OK to close the message box.

4. In the Rectangular Pattern dialog box, click the More button to expand the dialog box, and
then select Optimized.

5. Click OK to create the optimized pattern.

294 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Lesson: Creating Circular Patterns

You use the Circular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a circular pattern. When you start
the Circular Pattern tool, you first choose to pattern individual features or the entire solid. You then
select a rotation axis, which serves as the center of the pattern. Next you set the pattern properties,
such as number of occurrences and angle. There are also options for controlling the creation method
and positioning method.
The following illustration demonstrates a circular hole pattern being created.

Access

Circular Pattern

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL+SHIFT+O

Lesson: Creating Circular Patterns ■ 295

 Circular Pattern Dialog Box
The Circular Pattern dialog box is displayed when you start the Circular Pattern tool.

Pattern Type Options

The following pattern types are available in the Circular Pattern dialog box:

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Individual Feature Click this button to pattern individual features.

Entire Solid Click this button to pattern the entire solid.

Feature-Axis Selection
When the Pattern Individual Features button is selected, you have the following selection options.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Features Select one or more features to be patterned.

Rotation Axis Specifies the axis, or pivot point, about which features are
rotated. Click Flip to reverse the direction of the pattern.

When the Pattern Entire Solid button is selected, you have the following selection option.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Include Work/Surface Select the work features to include in the pattern.
Features

296 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Pattern Placement Options
The following placement options are available in the Circular Pattern dialog box:

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Count Specify the number of occurrences for the pattern.
This number includes the original feature.
Angle Specify the angle for the pattern. The result of this angle is
based on the positioning method selected.
Mid Plane Creates a pattern where the occurrences are distributed
on both sides of the original feature.

Creation Method Options

The following options are available in the Creation Method section of the Circular Pattern dialog box:

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Optimized For pattern occurrences of 50 or more, increases pattern
performance.
Identical With this method, each occurrence uses an identical
termination method, regardless of where it intersects other
features.
Adjust Enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. This
method requires more processing and can increase
computational time on large patterns.

Positioning Method Options

The following options are available in the Positioning Method section of the Circular Pattern
dialog box:

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Incremental Sets the angle value to represent the angle between
occurrences.
Fitted Sets the angle value to represent the total rotational
angle of the pattern.

Lesson: Creating Circular Patterns ■ 297

 Procedure: Creating Circular Patterns of the Entire Solid
The following steps describe to create circular patterns of the entire solid while including work
features in the pattern.

1. Create a part that contains the feature or features to be patterned.

2. On the panel bar, click the Circular Pattern tool and click the Pattern the Entire Solid button.

3. Click the Include Work/Surface Features button and select any work features to be included in
the pattern.

298 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

4. Select the Rotation Axis.

5. Specify the quantity placement information.

6. Click OK. The entire solid, along with the selected work features, is patterned

Lesson: Creating Circular Patterns ■ 299

Lesson: Mirroring Features

When you mirror part features, you must first have the features to be mirrored and a plane to use as
the symmetry plane. The symmetry plane can be any of the following:
■
An existing face on the part.
■ Any one of the origin work planes.
■
A new work plane.

With these conditions met, click the Mirror tool, select the features to be mirrored, then select the face
or work plane to use as the mirror plane. The features are mirrored about the selected plane and
displayed in the browser, with the included features and occurrences nested underneath the mirror
feature.
The features to be mirrored are highlighted in the browser.

Access

Mirror

Panel Bar: Part Features

Keyboard Shortcut: CTRL+SHIFT+M

300 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Mirror Dialog Box
The Mirror dialog box is displayed when you start the Mirror tool.

Mirror Type Options

The following mirror types are available in the Mirror dialog box:

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Individual Feature Click this button to mirror individual features.

Entire Solid Click this button to mirror the entire solid.

When the Mirror Individual Features button is selected, you have the following selection options.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Features Select one or more features to be patterned.

Mirror Plane Select a face or work plane to be used as the plane

of symmetry.

When the Mirror Entire Solid button is selected, you have the following selection option.

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Include Work/ Select the work features to be included in the
Surface Features mirror.

Lesson: Mirroring Features ■ 301

 Creation Method Options
The following options are available in the Creation Method area of the Mirror dialog box:

Dialog Box Access Option Description

Optimized Optimizes pattern performance.

Identical The default; creates the mirrored occurrences identical to the

original features.
Adjust to Enables the new mirrored occurrences to adjust to changes in
Model model geometry. For example if you are mirroring a cut
feature that extrudes through the part, using this option
enables that cut feature to extrude the part on the opposite
side, even if the part's thickness changes.
Note: Use this option only when necessary, because
additional processing resources are required to calculate the
new occurrences.

Example: Creation Method = Identical

Original hole features with through all
termination option.
Mirrored hole features.

Example: Creation Method = Adjust to Model

Original hole features with through all
termination option.
Mirrored hole features.

302 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Procedure: Mirroring Part Features
The following steps give an overview of mirroring part features.

1. Open or create a part that contains the

geometry intended to be symmetric.

2. On the panel bar, click the Mirror Feature tool

and select the features to be mirrored.

Lesson: Mirroring Features ■ 303

 3. In the Mirror Pattern dialog box, click the Mirror
Plane button and select a plane or face that
represents the plane of symmetry for the
mirrored features. Click OK.

4. The mirrored features are created.

304 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Exercise: Create Pattern Features
In this exercise, you open the face plate component
2. Create a rectangular pattern.
and create both rectangular and circular patterned
■
features. You then edit the patterned features to On the panel bar, click the Rectangular
suppress occurrences within each. Pattern tool and select the Extrusion3
feature as shown in the following
illustration. It may be easier to select the
feature in the browser.
■ Under Direction 1, click the Path button
and select the edge labeled 1 in the
following illustration. If necessary, use the
flip button to flip the path direction.
■
Under Direction 2, click the Path button
and select the edge labeled 2 in the
following illustration. If necessary use the
flip button to flip the path direction.
■
Adjust the occurrence and distance
options as shown and click OK.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 4: Detailed
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create
Pattern Features.

1. Open Receiver-Face-Plate.ipt.

Lesson: Mirroring Features ■ 305

3. Share a sketch to use as a pattern path. 5. Continue the pattern creation from the
■
previous step.
The Hole3 feature was created on a
■
sketch that can be used as the path for Under Direction 1, from the Spacing list,
the next pattern. In the browser, expand select Curve Length.
the Hole3 feature to expose the Sketch9 ■
In the Number of Occurrences box,
feature. enter 8. Click OK.
■ Right-click the Sketch9 feature.
Click Share Sketch. This action makes the
sketch available for additional features.

4. Create a pattern using a sketch as a path.

■ On the panel bar, click the Rectangular
Pattern tool and in the browser select
Hole3.
■ In the Rectangular Pattern dialog box, 6. In the browser, right-click Sketch9.
under Direction 1, click the Path button. Click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn
■ off the visibility of the shared sketched.
Select the shared sketch as shown in the
following illustration. 7. Create a circular pattern of a hole.
■
On the panel bar, click Circular Pattern.
■ Select the hole feature as shown in the
following illustration.

306 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

8. In the Circular Pattern dialog box, click the 10. Some of the occurrences that you just
Rotation Axis button and select the inside created are not required. You can suppress
face of the large hole as shown. these occurrences by expanding the feature
in the browser.
■ In the browser, expand the Circular
Pattern2 feature to expose the
occurrences.
■ While holding the CTRL key, select the
occurrences as shown in the following
illustration. Right-click one of the
selected occurrences. Click Suppress.

9. In the Number of Occurrences field, enter 10

and click OK.

11. Save and close all files.

Lesson: Mirroring Features ■ 307

Exercise: Mirror Part Features
In this exercise, you create a torsion bar component
2. On the panel bar, click Mirror and select the
that consists of multiple features that can be
Extrusion1, Hole2, and Extrusion2 features.
mirrored instead of recreated. You then create a new
Do not select the spline cut feature.
fillet feature and add that feature to the mirrored
features.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the 3. In the Mirror dialog box, click the Mirror Plane
steps in this book or in the onscreen button. Select the bottom face of the part and
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters click OK.
and exercises, click Chapter 4: Detailed
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Mirror Part
Features.

1. Open Torsion-Bar-Mirror.ipt.

Notice that because the spline feature was

not included in the mirror it does not extrude
through the part.

308 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

4. In the browser, click and drag the Extrusion3 7. Click OK to create the mirror feature. The
feature to move it under the Mirror3 feature. spline extrusion is no longer displayed
because the results of the mirror feature
override the extrusion feature.

Because the extrusion was created using the

Through All option, it now cuts through the 8. In the browser, click and drag the Extrusion3
part. feature to drag it below the Mirror4 feature.
5. On the panel bar, click Mirror. In the browser, Your part mode looks like the following
select the features as shown. illustration.

6. In the Mirror dialog box, click the Mirror Plane

button. In the browser, expand the Origin
folder and select YZ Plane, as shown.

Lesson: Mirroring Features ■ 309

9. In the browser, click and drag the End of Part ■ Select the two inside part faces as your
marker above the Mirror4 feature. surface to start and surface to end feature
creation.
■ Click OK to create the feature.

You do this so that you can create new

features before the Mirror4 feature is
considered. Dragging the End of Part marker
enables you to roll back the model history
and temporarily disregard all features
below it.
10. Create a new sketch.
■
Create a new sketch plane on the top
surface.
■ Draw and constrain the sketch as shown 12. On the panel bar, click the Fillet tool and
using the projected circle to locate it. select all the edges around the web feature
that you just created. Under Radius, enter
1 mm and click OK.

11. Extrude the new sketch to form a rib on the

part:
■
Start the Extrude tool.
■
Select your sketched rectangle as the
profile.
■
For Extents, use From To.

310 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

13. In the browser, click and drag the End of Part 17. Change the hole diameter to 5 mm and
marker below the Extrusion3 feature. click OK. The original hole feature and all
mirror occurrences are automatically
14. Edit the mirror feature to include the new changed to the new diameter.
extrusion and fillet.
■
In the browser, right-click the Mirror4
feature. Click Edit Feature.
■
In the Mirror Pattern dialog box, click the
Features button and select the new
extrusion and fillet features in the
browser. This action adds the features to
the mirror feature.
■
Click OK to save the changes to the mirror
feature.

18. Save and close all files.

15. Confirm that your model looks like the

following illustration.

16. In the browser, right-click the Hole2 feature.

Click Edit Feature.

Lesson: Mirroring Features ■ 311

Lesson: Creating Thin-Walled Parts

This lesson describes creating thin-walled parts using the Shell tool. You use shell features to remove
material from existing solid features. By using shell features, you can create the overall shape of your
part and then create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Define a thin-walled part.
■
Use the Shell tool to create shelled features.

312 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

About Thin-Walled Part Design
A thin-walled part is the result of offsetting existing faces to create new faces and then removing the
remaining volume of the part. This process creates a hollow interior for the part.
While there is always more than one way to create parts, using the Shell tool to create thin-walled parts
is generally the most efficient method. The following illustration demonstrates a solid both before and
after applying a shell feature.

Definition of Thin-Walled Parts

You apply the Shell tool to existing part models to produce a shell. Objects like a drinking cup, cell
phone case, and a computer casing can be considered thin-walled parts. These parts are originally
created as complete solid models. You use the Shell tool to remove the unwanted material.

Lesson: Creating Thin-Walled Parts ■ 313

 Example of Thin-Walled Parts
Plastic containers for consumer products, such as soda or cleaning solution bottles, are other
examples of thin-walled containers. The following illustration of a plastic bottle is representative
of these.

Creating Shell Features

You use the Shell tool to create shelled features on existing solid geometry. With the Shell tool, you
can remove material from an existing part and create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness
for the faces. One key advantage to using the Shell tool is that you can create differing wall thickness
for each face of the part. Generally, you select at least one face on the part to be removed from the
shell feature leaving the remaining faces as the shell walls.
The following illustration shows the part before and after adding a shell feature.

Access

Shell

Panel Bar: Part Features

314 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Shell Options
The Shell dialog box is displayed when you start the Shell tool.

The following features and options are available in the Shell dialog box:

Inside The thickness is applied to the inside of the existing faces.

Outside The thickness is applied to the outside of the existing faces.
Both Half of the thickness is applied to each side of the face.
Remove Faces Click this icon to select the face(s) to remove from the shell
feature. The remaining faces serve as walls for the shell feature. If
you do not remove any faces from the shell feature, the result is a
cavity in the part with no open faces.
Automatic Face Chain When selected, all faces that are tangent to the selected face are
selected. Clear this selection to prevent tangent faces from being
automatically selected.
Thickness Specify value for the wall thickness.
Unique Face Thickness - Select the face(s) to apply a unique wall thickness. This value
Select overrides the default thickness for the selected face(s) only.
Unique Face Thickness - Enter a value to apply to the selected face(s).
Thickness
Unique Face Thickness - Click the Click to Add area of the dialog box to create unique face
Click to Add thicknesses for the shell feature.

Lesson: Creating Thin-Walled Parts ■ 315

 Procedure: Creating Shell Features
The following steps describe how to create shell features.

1. Create a part representing the overall shape required.

2. On the panel bar, click the Shell tool and select the faces to remove from the shell operation.
Under Thickness, enter a wall thickness.

316 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

3. To assign unique wall thicknesses, click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box. Select the
Click to Add area and select the face(s) to assign a unique wall thickness. Under Unique Face
Thickness, specify a thickness for the selected face(s). Click OK to create the shell feature.

4. The shell feature is created.

Lesson: Creating Thin-Walled Parts ■ 317

Exercise: Create and Edit Shell Features
In this exercise, you create a shell feature for the part
Note: The thickness is applied to all
applying a common wall thickness to all faces. You
remaining faces on the part.
then edit the shell feature to include unique wall
thicknesses on different features.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 4: Detailed
3. Notice that the shell feature is created as
Shape Design. Click Exercise: Create and
shown in the following illustration.
Edit Shell Features.

1. Open Hair-Dryer-Housing.ipt.

2. To create a shell feature:

■
On the panel bar, click the Shell tool.
■
Clear the Automatic Face Chain option.
■ Select the faces indicated in the following
illustration.
■
In the Thickness box, enter 1 mm and
click OK.

318 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

4. You now edit the feature to remove another 6. Add a unique thickness to the handle area of
face and create a unique wall thickness the part:
around the hole features. ■
Select the Automatic Face Chain option.
■
In the browser, right-click the Shell5 ■
Click the [>>] button to expand the
feature. dialog box.
■
Click Edit Feature. ■
Select the Click to Add area and select the
5. Add another face to be removed from the faces as shown below.
■
shell: Under Unique Face Thickness, in the
■
Thickness column, enter 2 mm.
In the Shell dialog box, click the Remove
Faces button.
■
Select the opposite end of the
component as shown in the following
illustration.

Lesson: Creating Thin-Walled Parts ■ 319

7. Add a unique thickness to the large hole: 9. Notice that the shell feature is updated to
■
reflect the additional removed face, as well as
Select the Click to Add area.
the unique wall thickness.
■
Select the inside face of the large hole.
Under Unique Face Thickness, in the
Thickness column, enter 2.5 mm.

10. Save and close all files.

8. Add one more unique thickness to the two

smaller holes:
■
Select the Click to Add area.
■ Select the inside surface of the two
smaller holes.
■
Under Unique Face Thickness, in the
Thickness column, enter 1.5 mm.
Click OK.

320 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design

Chapter Summary

This chapter enhanced your basic part modeling skills by providing additional tools and
recommended workflows for detailed shape design. Understanding how to create chamfers and
fillets, place hole and thread features, pattern and mirror features, and create thin-walled parts greatly
extends your 3D part modeling capabilities to cover most part design requirements.
Having completed this chapter, you can:
■
Create both chamfers and fillets on a part.
■ Use the Hole and Thread tools to place hole and thread features on your part model.
■
Create rectangular and circular patterns and mirror existing features.
■
Create thin-walled parts using the Shell tool.

Chapter Summary ■ 321

322 ■ Chapter 4: Detailed Shape Design
 Chapter

5
Assembly Design Overview Chapter5:

In previous chapters, you learned the fundamental concepts and workflows for parametric part
design. Because most products include more than one component, you need to understand how
to work with multiple parts in a single design environment.
In this chapter, you are introduced to different approaches and workflows you can use to
combine multiple 3D parts into an assembly design. Due to the number of unique and standard
components included with all assembly designs, you also need to understand how to easily
manage and organize multiple files using Inventor project files.

Objectives
After completing this chapter, you will be able to:
■ Describe the assembly modeling process, the Autodesk® Inventor® assembly modeling
environment, and recommended assembly design workflows.
■
Describe how to use Autodesk Inventor project files to manage design projects.

323
Lesson: Designing Assemblies

This lesson describes the assembly modeling process, the Autodesk Inventor assembly modeling
environment, and recommended assembly design workflows.
Assembly models enable you to create fully parametric 3D representations of your design. You can use
these models to validate design options and identify problem areas before a single part is
manufactured. Assembly modeling can also reduce and in some cases eliminate the need for
traditional prototypes.
The following illustration shows a typical assembly model comprised of multiple parts and fasteners.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■ Describe assembly modeling and the procedures you use to create an assembly model.
■
Describe the basic approaches to assembly modeling.
■
Identify the key interface elements of the assembly design environment and their overall function.
■ State the recommended assembly design workflow.

324 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

About Assembly Design
Using assembly modeling, you create or bring individual components into a common environment
and use various tools to assemble them. You create new geometry, place existing parts or assemblies,
and manage the relationships among the parts in the assembly.

Definition of an Assembly Model

You create an assembly by combining multiple components and/or assemblies into a single
environment. Parametric relationships are created between each component that determines
component behavior in the assembly.
These relationships can range from simple constraint-based relationships that determine a
component's position in the assembly, to advanced relationships such as adaptivity. Adaptivity
enables a component to change size based upon its relationship to other components in the
assembly.

Lesson: Designing Assemblies ■ 325

Constraints

Assembly Constraints
You use assembly constraints to create parametric relationships between parts in the assembly. Just
as you use 2D constraints to control 2D geometry, you use 3D constraints in an assembly to position
parts in relation to other parts. There are four basic assembly constraints, each with unique solutions
and options.

Mate/Flush Constraint
Used to align part features such as faces, edges, or axis.

Before Mate Constraint After Mate Constraint

Before Flush Constraint After Flush Constraint

Angle Constraint
Used to specify an angle between two parts. Applied to faces, edges, or axes.

Before Angle Constraint After Angle Constraint

326 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

 Tangent Constraint
Used to define a tangential relationship between two parts. Generally applied to circular faces and
planar faces. One of the selected faces must be circular.

Before Tangent Constraint After Tangent Constraint

Insert Constraint
Used to insert one component into another. This constraint effectively combines a mate axis/axis and
a mate face/face constraint. Generally applied to bolts, or pins, or any part that needs to be inserted
into a hole on another part. Applied by selecting a circular edge on each part.

Before Insert Constraint After Insert Constraint

Assembly Design Approaches

Before you create assembly models, you must understand the three basic methods you use to create
them and how to choose the correct assembly modeling approach.
■
Using existing components
■
Designing components in-place
■ Grouping components using subassemblies

Regardless of which method you use to create the assembly, the part data resides in individual part
files and is referenced into the assembly file.

Lesson: Designing Assemblies ■ 327

Using Existing Components
Process: Using Existing Components
The following steps provide an overview of the process of using existing components in an assembly
design. Individual components for an assembly are designed outside of the assembly where they are
placed.

1. Each part file is designed separately from the assembly and other parts.
2. After you create the parts, they are placed into the assembly and constrained to other parts.

The following image illustrates how separate components are gathered together into a new assembly.

Flange component
Collar component
Standard bolt component
Assembly model

328 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Designing Components In-Place
Process: Designing Components In-Place
The following steps provide an overview of the process of designing components in-place for an
assembly. All assembly components are designed in the context of the assembly.

1. Create a new assembly and create a new component while in the

context of the assembly.

2. Design each component while still in the assembly environment.

3. As you design each component, you are applying the required

assembly constraints, and are making changes to parts based upon
their relationships to other components in the assembly.

Lesson: Designing Assemblies ■ 329

Subassemblies
You use subassemblies to organize large assemblies into smaller groups. A subassembly is essentially
an assembly placed into another assembly. In the context of the overall assembly, the subassembly
behaves as a single part. Components within the subassembly are constrained to each other, while the
subassembly is constrained to the overall assembly as a single component. You must edit constraints
within the assembly where they were created. To do this, you activate the subassembly by double-
clicking the subassembly in the browser.

Guidelines
Keep the following general guidelines in mind for assembly design.
■
You can use all three approaches to assembly design and switch between them at any time.
■
You can begin the assembly using one method and change to a different one.
■ As you become more proficient with the application, and understand the benefits of each
modeling approach, you can choose the best approach for a given task.

330 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Assembly Design Environment
Graphics Window and Standard Tools
The assembly environment in Autodesk Inventor is virtually the same as the part modeling
environment, with the exception of tools that are unique to assembly modeling.
A typical view of the Inventor assembly environment is shown in the following illustration.

Assembly Panel – Contains tools specific to assembly modeling.

Assembly Browser – Lists all parts and their constraints. When a part is activated for editing,
the browser functions are identical to the part modeling environment.
Assembly Coordinate Elements – Identical to the part environment, each assembly also
contains an independent coordinate system. Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin
planes, axes, and centerpoint.
Assembly Components – Each component in the assembly is listed. Expand the components
to expose the assembly constraints that have been applied.
3D Indicator – Displays the current view orientation relative to the assembly coordinate
system.

Lesson: Designing Assemblies ■ 331

 Panel Bar
Assembly Panel
Similar to the Part Modeling Panel, the Assembly Panel contains the tools specific to assembly
modeling. As you create your assembly model, the panel bar automatically switches among assembly,
part, and sketch modes depending on the context you are using.
Notice the keyboard shortcuts next to each icon. Enter these key sequences to start the related tool.
The Assembly Panel is shown in the following illustration.

After you become familiar with the assembly tool icons, you can turn off the text display with icons. At
the top of the panel bar, select the Assembly Panel list, and clear the Display Text with Icons check box.

By turning off the text display with icons, you make more room available for the assembly or part
browser.

332 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Assembly Browser
The assembly browser offers several options for working in the assembly environment and is your
primary tool for interacting with assembly components and features.
When you open the browser in the assembly modeling environment, it displays the origin folder
containing the default X, Y, and Z planes, axes, and center point. It also lists all parts that you use in the
assembly.
Nested under each part, you see the assembly constraints. If you select an assembly constraint, an edit
box is displayed at the bottom of the browser, enabling you to edit the offset or angle value for the
constraint.

Note: If you select the Assembly View list, you can select Modeling View to switch the browser to
display the part features nested under the parts instead of the assembly constraints. This result is
useful when performing part modeling functions in the context of the assembly.

Lesson: Designing Assemblies ■ 333

Recommended Assembly Design Workflow
When you create an assembly, the approach and process you utilize can and will vary depending on
the design requirements.

Process: Creating Assemblies

The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating assemblies using Autodesk Inventor.

1. Create a new assembly using one of the assembly templates provided.

2. Place existing parts into the assembly or create new parts in the context of the assembly.
3. Use standard assembly constraints such as Mate, Angle, Tangent, and Insert to position and
constrain the parts to other parts in the assembly.
4. Repeat the steps above until all components are added to the assembly.

Example of a Typical Assembly Design

The following illustration shows a typical assembly modeling workflow. The first part is created in the
context of the assembly. The next part is then created in the context of the assembly. Additional
components such as standard parts are also added to the assembly. All parts are constrained
appropriately whether or not they were created in the context of the assembly or outside of the
assembly as a separate part.

334 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Exercise: Use the Assembly Environment
In this exercise, you open an assembly and explore
3. To edit an assembly constraint:
the assembly modeling environment. You
■
experiment with different interface objects in the In the browser, expand Fixture_Base:1
assembly, part modeling, and sketching and select the Insert:1 constraint.
environments. ■
At the bottom of the browser, in the edit
box, enter 10.00 and press ENTER.

The offset value of the insert constraint

changes.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of
chapters and exercises, click Chapter 5:
Assembly Design Overview. Click 4. Compare the new position of the
Exercise: Use the Assembly Environment. Fixture_RightSide:1 component with the
following illustration.

1. Open Fixture.iam.

2. The Assembly Panel is automatically loaded

when you open an assembly file.

Lesson: Designing Assemblies ■ 335

5. On the Assembly View menu, click 9. To open a part in a separate window:
Modeling View. ■
In the browser, right-click the
The browser displays the part features instead Fixture_Base:1 component.
of assembly constraints. ■ Click Open.

The part is opened in a separate window and

the panel bar switches automatically to
display the Part Features panel bar.
10. In the browser, expand Extrusion1 and
double-click Sketch1. The panel bar switches
automatically to the 2D Sketch Panel.

6. To edit a part feature:

■ In the browser, right-click Extrusion1.
■
Click Edit Feature.

11. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit

the sketch.
12. Close all files. Do not save changes.

7. In the Extrude dialog box, click Cancel.

The Part Features panel bar is displayed
automatically.
8. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit
the part and return to the assembly.

336 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly
Designs

This lesson describes the characteristics and implementation of Autodesk Inventor project files.
You use project files to resolve path locations. When an assembly file is loaded, the location of the part
files must be resolved. The same is true when loading a drawing or presentation file.
In the following illustration, the active project is identified by the check mark.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe the characteristics and functions of project files.
■ Set up projects.
■
Create a project file for a single user.
■
Edit project files.
■ State some recommendations for setting up project files.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 337

About Project Files
When you use Autodesk Inventor software to create designs, each one consists of multiple files and
file types. The design and documentation of a single part file require at least two separate files:
(a) a part file and (b) a drawing file. The design and documentation of assembly models require a
minimum of three different file types: (a) assembly files, (b) part files, and (c) drawing files.
Using separate files for each file type is critical for performance and is common among most
parametric modeling systems. By storing path information for each project, the application can search
for the required files when opening an assembly, presentation, or drawing file. The need to search in
different path locations for files is the primary purpose of project files.
The following illustration shows file dependencies in a typical assembly design.

Assemblies reference parts

Drawings reference parts
Drawings reference assemblies
Drawings reference presentations
Presentations reference assemblies

When you open an assembly, drawing, or presentation file, the active project file is used to resolve
path locations to the referenced files.

Definition of Project Files

A project file is an ASCII text file that is stored with an *.ipj file extension. The file contains information
about paths and other options that enable Inventor to resolve the file references of other files when
you open an assembly, presentation, or drawing file.
When you create designs you probably organize them in different folder locations. The same is true
for Autodesk Inventor project files. You generally create one project file for each design you create.
While there is no limit to the number of project files you can create, only one project can be active
at a time.

338 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

In the following illustration, the active project is identified by the check mark.

Example of a Project File

It is recommended that you store your project file in the upper level folder of your project design
folders. This keeps your project file organized with your designs and simplifies portability issues.
The following illustration shows the folder structure for a project and where the project file is located.

A typical project might have parts and assemblies unique to the project, standard components unique
to your company, and off-the-shelf components such as fasteners, fittings, or electrical components.
To reduce the possibility of file resolution problems, set up a folder structure before you create a
project and start saving files. To help organize your design files, it is a good idea to set up subfolders
under your project workspace or workgroup folder. You can keep all your design files for a project in
the subfolders, making it a logical way to organize the files used in a design project. Because
references are stored as relative paths from project folders, if you change the folder structure, move,
or rename files, you are likely to break file references.
Always save new files in the workspace or workgroup defined for your project or one of its subfolders.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 339

 Projects Folder Option
Because you can store your project files in several different locations, you need an efficient way of
locating them. Rather than search every folder on your computer or network, Autodesk Inventor uses
Microsoft Windows shortcuts to point to the project files that have been accessed on your computer.
On the Tools menu, click Application Options, then click the Files tab. The default Projects Folder
option is set to your My Documents folder. If you want to use a different path for your project files,
enter or browse to a new location.

In the following illustration, the My Documents folder is selected to list all files. The Project file
shortcuts in the right pane of the Explorer window are not the actual project files. They are Microsoft
Windows shortcuts to the actual project files.

340 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Project File Configuration
Each project file contains a series of categories and options. To successfully design a project file, you
must understand how to use these categories and options, to ensure proper file referencing when you
design assemblies.

Projects Dialog Box

You use the Projects dialog box to create, edit, or set a project file to current. The dialog box is divided
into two panes. The top pane lists the currently available projects, while the lower pane shows the
settings and configured options for the selected project.

Select Project Pane Select a project to edit it, or double-click a project to make it active.
Note: You cannot edit the active project or activate a different
project if there are files open in Autodesk Inventor.
Edit Project Pane Select the category or right-click the option you want to change.
When you edit search paths they are divided into two sections:
(a) Named Shortcut and (b) Category Search Path.
Named Shortcut Enter the shortcut name as you would like it to appear in the Open
dialog box. This enables you to navigate easily to the search path.
Category Search Path Enter the path name or click the browse button to define the path
location.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 341

 Open Dialog Box—Location Shortcuts
When you open files, the Locations area of the dialog box displays all of the named shortcuts
contained in the active project.

Project File Categories

Each project file is divided into separate categories in which you define different paths. A typical
design makes use of some or all of these categories depending on the structure of your assembly and
the environment in which you are working.

Category Description
Type Defines the type of project. Unless you also have Autodesk® Vault
installed, you only create single-user project files.
Location Displays the physical location of the project file.
Workspace A personal location where you edit your personal copy of design
files. Only one designer should have access to the files in the folder
called out in the workspace.
Workgroup Search Paths Within this group you can define multiple search paths for accessing
files. You do this when you want to add levels of organization to your
design files or access files from another designer.

342 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

 Category Description
Use Style Libraries Defines whether or not the project uses a style library. Options are
Yes, Read Only, and No.
Libraries You use this category to define search paths for part libraries. Part
libraries can consist of standard off-the-shelf components that you
use in your designs or can also include common parts that you
design. Common factors in all libraries include that the path is
considered by the application to be read-only, and parts stored
within a library search path rarely, if ever, change. If library folders are
defined, each needs a descriptive name that should not change.
Because the library name is stored in the reference, changing the
library name later breaks library references.
Frequently Used This group is used to define paths of frequently used subfolders
Subfolders within the project folder structure.
Folder Options This group contains options for setting the folder locations of style
libraries, templates, and Content Center files.
Options You use these properties to set specific options for the project file.

Project Categories—Search Order

Knowing and remembering the category search order is critical to properly implementing and
managing project files. The following illustration represents a typical project file with path locations
defined in each category. When the application needs to locate referenced files, it searches for files
using paths contained in each category using the following order.
1. Libraries
2. Workspace
3. Workgroup Search Paths

A simple way to remember the search order is to remember libraries first, and then the order each
category is displayed in the project window.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 343

 File Resolution
When examining this diagram, you see the assembly file is stored in a different location from the
component files.
■
Component files exist in the Components folder.
■ Assembly files exist in the Robot Assembly folder.

Because the Components folder is a subfolder of the defined workspace, it is used to resolve the
component locations. The Hex Cap Screw is stored in a folder defined as a Library category.

Relative Paths in Your Project Files

When you add paths to each category, the application stores only the relative path. The relative path
is created by removing the project file location from the path text and leaving only the remaining path
information. Using relative paths enables greater portability of your project files and data sets. When
you view the paths under each category, the path settings begin with . followed by the folder location
relative to the physical location of the project file. In the following example, the Robot-Assembly.ipj file
is stored in the folder C:\Designs\Robot Assembly.
By storing only relative paths in your project file, it is possible to physically move the entire folder
structure to another location or storage device. As long as the folders maintain their relative location
to the storage location of the project file, the application can resolve the files as required.

Location of project file

Relative path
Full path
Full path

344 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Frequently Used Subfolders
Projects have a Frequently Used Subfolders category that you can use to list commonly used
subfolders for accessing Autodesk Inventor files. Adding subfolder locations to this category simplifies
the task of navigating to these folders when opening files.
It is important to note the following:
■
The folder specified must be a subfolder of an existing search path in the project being worked on.
■
The folder entries have no effect on file resolution and are used only to aid in navigating when
opening and saving files.

The following illustration represents a project file containing several paths in the Frequently Used
Subfolders category.

The Open and Save dialog boxes display the Frequently Used Subfolder locations. Click the folder in
the Locations list to navigate to the folder.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 345

 Project File Folder Options
Folder options identify where project level files such as templates and styles are stored.

Option Description
Design Data Identifies where the project-specific style definitions are stored.

Templates Specifies the location of the Autodesk Inventor document templates for
the project.

Content Center Files Specifies the location of the Content Center files used in the project.

Project Options
The following options can be set for each project.

Option Description
Use Style Library Specifies whether all files created with this project will use style libraries or not.
Yes: Indicates all files will use the style library for storing and management of style-
related properties.
Read Only: Indicates all files will use the style library with read-only permissions.
No: Indicates style libraries will not be used and all style related properties will
originate from templates.

Old Versions to Specifies the number of versions to keep when you save changes. Older versions of
Keep on Save each file are stored in an Old Versions subfolder of the file location.

346 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

 Option Description
Using Unique File Specifies whether all files in the project have unique file names. Not applicable for
Names library locations.
Yes: Indicates that no duplicate file names are used in the project. The application
searches through all editable project locations to find the file name, even if it was
last accessed from a different folder.
No: Indicates that duplicate file names exist in the project. If duplicate file names
are found when resolving files, the Resolve Files dialog box opens so you can
browse to the correct file to manually reestablish the link.

Name Indicates the name of the project file.

Shortcut Indicates the name of the project file shortcut.

Owner Identifies the project owner, typically the lead engineer or CAD administrator.

Release ID Identifies the version of the released project data. If a project is used as a library by
another project, the release ID may be useful in identifying which project to use.

Results of the search are listed in the Non-Unique Project File Names dialog box.

The use of unique file names within a project helps ensure that the correct files are always resolved
when you open an assembly or other document that references other Autodesk Inventor files.

Vault Options
The following illustration represents vault options that are available. Autodesk Vault must be installed
for these options to be displayed.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 347

Creating a Project File
You begin to create project files through a wizard. You are prompted to fill in relevant information
such as project name, workspace folder, and libraries to import from other projects. After the initial
creation is complete, you proceed to add the required paths to the categories you will use.

Access

Projects

Menu: File > Projects

Open or New Dialog Boxes: Projects
Windows Menu: Start > All Programs > Autodesk > Autodesk Inventor 2009 >
Tools > Project Editor

348 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Procedure: Creating a Single-User Project File
The following steps describe how to create a single-user project.

1. Access the Projects dialog box by clicking

File menu > Projects.
2. Select the New Single User Project type and
click Next.

3. In the Name field, enter a name for the project.

In the Project (Workspace) Folder field, enter a
path location for storing the files for this
project. Click Next.

4. If you have any projects with libraries defined,

they are displayed in this list. You can use this
information to copy library paths from other
project files.
■
Click Finish to create the project.
■ If you are prompted to create the path,
click OK.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 349

Editing Project Files
You can use the internal project editor or the stand-alone project editor located on the Microsoft
Windows Start menu to edit projects. Under Select Project, select the project to edit. In the Edit Project
area, select the category or option you need to edit. Depending on the item you edit, different options
are available on both the shortcut menu and to the right of the Edit Project area.

Access

Projects

Menu: File > Projects

Windows Menu: Start > Programs > Autodesk > Autodesk Inventor 2009 > Tools >
Project Editor

Editing Projects
When editing projects, right-click a category or option to display the available editing tools in a
shortcut menu.

Editing the Active Project

You must close all files in Autodesk Inventor before attempting to edit the active project.

350 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Workspace and Library Category Options

Option Description
Add Path This option adds a path to the workspace category. Enter a named
shortcut and search path in the fields below the category.
Add Paths from File This option adds the workspace path contained in another project
file. A dialog box is displayed for you to select the project file.
Paste Path This option pastes a path that was copied to the clipboard.
Delete Section Paths This option deletes all paths from the category.

Workgroup Category Search Path Options

Option Description
Add Path This option adds a path to the workspace category.
Add Paths from File This option adds the workspace paths contained in another project
file. A dialog box is displayed for you to select the project file.
Add Paths from Directory Select this option to add the path of a selected directory including all
subdirectories.
Paste Path Select this option to paste a path that was copied to the clipboard.
Delete Section Paths Select this option to delete all paths from the category.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 351

 Edit and Position Buttons
Edit and position buttons are displayed on the right side of the Projects dialog box.

Button Option Description

Move Up Select this option to move the selected path up in the search
order within its category.
Move Down Select this option to move the selected path down in the
search order within its category.
Add Path Select this option to add a path to the selected category.

Edit Path Select this option to edit the selected path.

Expand Click this button to display the Workspace and Workgroup

categories. These categories are hidden by default.
Find Duplicate Files Located in the Project Editor interface. You use the Find
Duplicate Files button to search the current project for files with
duplicate names within the editable search paths.
Configure Content Click this button to display the Configure Libraries dialog box
Center Libraries and configure the Content Center libraries.

Recommendations for Project Files

Your project file design will depend largely upon the type of design project it is intended to be used.
For example, if your current design task only involves 1 person, you would probably use a Single User
project file. This could apply even if you are part of a larger design team or company. For example, you
might be working on a small R&D project that only requires one designer. In this case, even though
you are part of an engineering and design department of a large company, the R&D project
requirements dictate a Single User project file.
On the other hand, you may, at the same time be required to collaborate with other designers on
larger design/manufacturing projects. In this case, the recommended project type would be a Vault
project. The Vault project type would enable all designers to interact with the design data at the same
time without the fear of overwriting the work of others. This is because the Vault project type requires
each user to check files out of the vault before they can be edited. Other files that are not being edited
can still be referenced, as they remain in the vault.

352 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Guidelines for Creating Project Files
Consider the following guidelines when you design projects for simple design projects.
■ When you create the project file, select the Single User project type.
■
Store the physical project file at the root of your design folders. This will allow the data stored in
subfolders to be stamped with a relative path designation. This makes your design project
portable and will simplify the transition process if the design makes it through the R&D process
into an actual design/manufacturing project where other designers may be required to
collaborate.
■ Add a path to common components as a Library path. This path is read-only and the components
that are stored there, rarely, if-ever change.
■
If additional paths are required, add them as Workgroup Search Paths.

Guidelines for Project Files Used in Complex Projects or Large Design Teams
Consider the following guidelines when designing project files for complex design projects, or when
large design teams collaborate on design projects.
■
When you create the project file, select the Vault project type. Autodesk Vault must be installed.
■ For more information on Autodesk Vault, refer to the AOTC: Autodesk Vault Essentials courseware
or inquire about training options with your local training center or reseller.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 353

 Examples of Project Types
The following illustrations show the differences between a project design for use by a single user and
small amounts of design data, and a project designed for use by several users and large amounts of
design data. In the single-user example, the design data is stored on a local drive or perhaps a network
drive, but is generally edited by only one person at a time. In the Vault project the design data is stored
in the Vault and is available to several designers at the same time. The Vault manages the data and
prevents the users from overwriting each others' work, while at the same time offering other
capabilities that would be required in a large design project.

Single user project type Vault project for larger complex designs and
multiple users

354 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Exercise: Create a Project File
In this exercise, you create a single-user project file
5. To define the project as a single-user project:
with a workspace and library.
■
In the Inventor project wizard dialog box,
verify that New Single User Project is
selected.
■
Click Next.
6. To name and locate the project file:
■
For Name, enter R&D.
■ Click the Browse button next to the
Project (Workspace) Folder field and
browse for the C:\R&D Designs folder.
■ Select the folder and click OK.
The completed exercise ■
Click Finish.
7. To add a library path:
Completing the Exercise
■
In the Projects dialog box, right-click the
To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen Libraries category.
■
exercise. In the onscreen list of Click Add Path.
chapters and exercises, click Chapter
5: Assembly Design Overview. Click
Exercise: Create a Project File.

1. Ensure that all files in Autodesk Inventor are

closed.
2. To set up the exercise, you need to create
some folders to simulate a theoretical design
scenario. 8. To name and configure the library path:
Using Windows Explorer, create the folders as ■
In the Name text box enter
shown to simulate a typical R&D Designs StandardParts.
folder structure and a StandardParts folder ■ In the Search Path text box, enter
for storing commonly used components.
C:\StandardParts.
■
Click Save.

3. Click File menu > Projects.

4. In the Projects dialog box:
■ Notice the name of the active project,
identified by a check mark.
■
Click New.

Lesson: Using Project Files in Assembly Designs ■ 355

9. To activate the project, double-click it in the
Project dialog box.
When it is activated, a check mark is displayed
next to the project.
Note: Your list of available projects differs
from the list shown.

10. Click Done to close the dialog box.

11. To test the project:
■
Click File menu > Open.
■
In the Open dialog box, with the
Workspace selected (1), make sure the
R&D folders (2) you created earlier are
visible.
■ Select the StandardParts (3) library.
Ensure that the Look In list changes to
reflect the StandardParts folder you
created earlier.

12. Click Cancel to close the Open dialog box.

13. Click File menu > Projects. Double-click the
previously active project file.

356 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview

Chapter Summary

With the information you learned in this chapter, you can make informed decisions about assembly
design before you start a design project. With your understanding of the different approaches,
workflow options, and the basics of assembly design, you can continue on to subsequent chapters
that cover the individual tools and specific workflows that are available in the assembly design
environment.
Having completed this chapter, you can:
■ Describe the assembly modeling process, the Autodesk Inventor assembly modeling
environment, and recommended assembly design workflows.
■
Describe how to use Autodesk Inventor project files to manage design projects.

Chapter Summary ■ 357

358 ■ Chapter 5: Assembly Design Overview
 Chapter

6
Placing, Creating, and
Constraining Components Chapter6:

This chapter covers the most common tasks in assembly design. One common task is to place
components into an assembly and then define their orientation to one another. This includes
components you have designed as well as industry-standard components. Another common
task is to design a new part in the context of the assembly. Understanding the tools and
workflows associated with both approaches provides the flexibility you need to create realistic
and complete assembly designs.

Objectives
After completing this chapter, you will be able to:
■
Place components in an assembly using the Place Component tool.
■ Place assembly constraints on components in the assembly.
■
Use the Content Center to place standard components into your assembly design.
■
Create new components in the context of the assembly.

359
Lesson: Placing Components in an Assembly

Overview
This lesson describes placing components into an assembly. As you create assemblies you place
component geometry that represents the assembly's individual parts.
In the following illustration, the assembly was created by placing components into the
assembly model.

A basic and critical aspect of any assembly design is the process of placing components in the
assembly. While in some cases you are creating new components in the context of the assembly, in
many other instances you need to use components that have already been designed. In order to use
these components in the assembly, they must be placed.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe the process of placing components in an assembly.
■
Use the Place Component tool to place parts into an assembly.

360 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

About Placing Components in an Assembly
When you create an assembly model, there may be components that you are not designing in the
context of the assembly. You must place these components into the assembly. A typical assembly
model consists of components that were created in the context of the assembly and components that
were created outside of the assembly.
In the following illustration, part files are being dragged from Windows Explorer to the assembly file.
This is only one method with which you can place components in an assembly.

Definition of Placing Components in an Assembly

Placing components in an assembly is a process in which you add external part files or files from other
sources to your assembly model. By doing so, you create a link between the assembly file and the part
file. While the component's geometry is completely visible and can be manipulated and edited in the
assembly environment, its definition is stored in a file that is separate from the assembly. This file link
occurs, even though the component is created in the context of the assembly. All component file
definitions are stored separately.
Because the component file exists outside of the assembly, it can be used in the other assemblies.
In the following illustration, the Design Assistant shows the file references that are created by placing
components into the assembly. Each of the *.ipt files represents the component file definitions.

Lesson: Placing Components in an Assembly ■ 361

 Sources of Placed Components
As you use Autodesk® Inventor® software to build assemblies, you can use geometry from other
applications as parts in your assembly. The following list details the supported formats that you can
place into an assembly.
■ Autodesk Inventor parts and assemblies (*.ipt, *.iam)
■
AutoCAD Drawings (*.dwg)
■
DXF Files (*.dxf)
■ IDF Board File (*.brd, *.emn, *.bdf, *.idb)
■
IGES files (*.igs, *.ige, *.iges)
■
Parasolid Binary and Text Files (*.x_b, *.x_t)
■ Pro Engineer (*.prt*, *.asm*, *.g, *.neu*)
■
SAT files (*.sat) (ACIS/ShapeManager)
■
STEP files (*.stp, *.ste, *.step)
■ SolidWorks Files (*.prt, *.sldprt, *.asm, *.sldasm)
■
UGS NX Files (*.prt)

Different capabilities are available with each of these formats. Some formats are converted to
Autodesk Inventor files when placed into an assembly, but others such as AutoCAD® Mechanical are
linked to the assembly. Any changes in the AutoCAD Mechanical file are reflected in the assembly.

Supported File Types

In the Open dialog box, select the Files of Type drop-down list to display the supported file types.

362 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

 Example of Placing Components in an Assembly
In the following illustration, two assembly models are shown. Advancements in motor and power
supply technology enable you to redesign the base with a slightly lower height profile. The design
requirements dictate that you create these two different assemblies by using as many common
components as possible. As you create the second assembly, you place components also used in the
first assembly. You place a copy of the base component and modify it according to the lower height
profile requirements.

Original base component

New lower-profile base component

Placing Components in an Assembly

You use the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly. Select this tool and the
Place Component dialog box is displayed. The Place Component dialog box is similar to the Open
dialog box in both style and function; however, the end result is that the selected file is placed into the
assembly file instead of opened for editing.
The first component you place into the assembly is automatically placed at the assembly's origin point
(0,0,0) and is grounded. Subsequent parts and subassemblies when placed are located by selecting
screen locations, and need to be constrained to fix their positions.

Lesson: Placing Components in an Assembly ■ 363

 Access

Place Component

Panel Bar: Assembly Panel

Shortcut Menu: Place Component
Menu: Insert > Place Component
Keyboard: P

Place Component Dialog Box

The Place Component dialog box is displayed when you start the Place Component Tool. Select the
file to place into the assembly and click Open. To place files other than Autodesk Inventor files, select
the file type in the Files of Type list.

364 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Place Component Orientation
When adding a component to an assembly, the orientation of the component is either the way it is
saved in its component file, or the way the last occurrence of that component is oriented in the
assembly. You set which orientation you want to use, file or last occurrence, in the Application Options
dialog box, Assembly tab.
By default, the option Use Last Occurrence Orientation for Component Placement is not selected.
When this option is not selected, the orientation of placed components corresponds to their file
orientation. When this option is selected, the orientation for placed components aligns with the
orientation of the last occurrence for that component in the assembly.

In the following illustration, the first (1) and second (2) placed components are identified. The second
component placed has been constrained, causing the orientation of the last placed occurrence to be
changed from the default orientation. When another component is placed in the assembly, the
resulting orientation is based on how the option Use Last Occurrence Orientation for Component
Placement is set. When it is not selected, the next placed component orientation is as shown in the
middle image. When the option is selected, the next component's orientation is as shown on the right.

Lesson: Placing Components in an Assembly ■ 365

 Assembly Coordinate System
Each assembly file contains an independent coordinate system. Default coordinate system elements
are aligned with the 0,0,0 point in the assembly and can be used as you build the assembly. When you
place the first part into the assembly, the origin point of the part file is matched to the origin point of
the assembly file.
Note: This applies only if the first part in the assembly is placed into the assembly and not created in
the context of the assembly. These components can be repositioned if required.

Grounded Components
By default, the first part in each assembly is grounded. All degrees of freedom are removed from the
component and it cannot be moved. When you apply constraints to a grounded component, the
nongrounded component moves to validate the constraint, while the grounded component remains
fixed in its position.
Although the first part is grounded, there is no limit to the number of grounded parts that you can
have in an assembly. You can also remove the grounded property from the first part in the assembly.
When you ground parts, you can use them to mimic real-world situations where some parts are fixed
in position, while others move relative to the parts to which they have been constrained.
Grounded components are displayed in the browser with the following icon:

In the browser or graphics window, right-click the part, and on the shortcut menu click Grounded. A
check mark indicates that the component is grounded.

366 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Procedure: Placing Components
The following steps describe how to place components into an assembly.

1. Open or create a new assembly file.

2. Start the Place Component tool.
3. In the Place Component dialog box, select the file you want to place into the assembly, and
click Open.
4. The first component in the assembly is positioned automatically and is grounded, indicated by
the push-pin icon. Optionally, place additional components by clicking other locations in the
graphics window, or press ESC to cancel.

5. On the panel bar, click the Place Component tool and continue to place components into the
assembly.

Lesson: Placing Components in an Assembly ■ 367

Exercise: Place Components in an Assembly
In this exercise, you use the techniques covered in
3. On the panel bar, click the Place Component
this lesson to place components into a new
tool. In the Place Component dialog box,
assembly.
double-click Robot-Base-Model-A.ipt.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise 4. Press ESC to cancel the Place Component

To complete the exercise, follow the tool.
steps in this book or in the onscreen
■ The first occurrence is automatically
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 6: Placing, placed at the assembly origin.
Creating, and Constraining Components. ■
In the browser, notice that the first
Click Exercise: Place Components in an component is automatically grounded.
Assembly.

1. Create a new assembly file based on the

Standard (mm).iam template.
2. On the Standard toolbar, click Save to save
the assembly. In the Save As dialog box, enter
Robot-Assembly-A.iam. Click Save.

368 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

5. To place another component:
■ On the keyboard press P to start the
Place Component tool.
■
In the Place Component dialog box,
double-click Robot-Axis1-2.ipt and
position the component as shown.
■
Press ESC to cancel the command.

7. Notice how the components are spaced.

The actual arrangement may differ on your
screen depending on the order in which the
components were selected.

6. To drag components into an assembly:

■ Open Windows Explorer and navigate to
the folder where you installed the dataset
for this exercise. The default location is
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\
Autodesk Learning\Inventor 2009\
Essentials\Workspace\Parts.
■ Highlight the following part files and then
click and drag them into the assembly
window at the same time.
• Robot-Axis2-3.ipt 8. Save and close all files.
• Robot-Axis3-4.ipt
• Robot-Axis4-5.ipt
• Robot-Axis5.ipt
• Robot-Axis5-Adapter.ipt
• Robot-Clamp.ipt
• Robot-Clamp-Mount.ipt

Lesson: Placing Components in an Assembly ■ 369

Lesson: Constraining Components

Overview
This lesson describes assembly constraints and how to apply, view, and edit them.

Constraining components is a vital part of the assembly design process. Using assembly constraints,
you are able to accurately position the components and define their relationships with other
components in the assembly.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■
Describe assembly constraints and their effect on components.
■
Apply basic assembly constraints to parts in the assembly.
■ Describe how assembly constraints affect individual parts in the assembly.
■
Use different methods to view and edit assembly constraints.
■
State some guidelines for proper constraining techniques.

370 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

About Assembly Constraints
When you build assemblies you define parametric relationships between the parts in the assembly.
The relationships created between parts using assembly constraints realistically mimic real-world
situations and operating conditions of the assembly components.
In the following illustration, an assembly constraint is used to align the center axes on each
component.

Definition of Assembly Constraints

As assembly constraint is a parametric relationship that you create between two components. There
are different types of constraints, each designed to simulate real-world conditions between the
components. For example, a mate constraint can be used to simulate two components positioned in
a way that would cause there faces or edges to touch.
Except for the first component, which is grounded, each component, when placed in the assembly,
has six available degrees of freedom; three translational and three rotational degrees of freedom. The
sole purpose of assembly constraints is to reduce the available degrees of freedom for a component.
You reduce available degrees of freedom to simulate the real-world condition for that component
when it is manufactured and combined with other components in the assembly.
The following illustration shows the Degrees of Freedom symbol representing the six degrees of
freedom.

Translational degree of freedom: the components can move along these axes.
Rotational degree of freedom: the components can rotate about these axes.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 371

 Each assembly constraint you apply effectively reduces the degrees of freedom on the component.
When you reduce the available degrees of freedom, you restrict the directions the component can
move or rotate.

Initial degrees of freedom on a component As you apply assembly constraints, the number of available
in the assembly, with no assembly constraints degrees of freedom is reduced. In this example, there are
being applied. three degrees of freedom remaining; two translational and
one rotational.

In the following illustration, an angle constraint is used to define the angle between the two
components. In this example, the angle is measured between the two selected faces, identified in the
image on the left.

Example of Assembly Constraints

In the following illustration, the robot assembly consists of several components. Each component is
designed to fit with the surrounding components and function within certain parameters. As each
component is added to the assembly or designed in the context of the assembly, assembly constraints
are used to define the relationships between each component.
After the constraints have been applied, the relationships between each component can be validated
by dragging and manipulating the positions of various components. When the constraint conditions
are valid, the connected components will move with the component being manipulated. This helps
you to simulate the behavior of these components in a virtual environment.

372 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

The Constraint Tool
There are four basic assembly constraints. Each is designed to create a certain constraint condition
between the components in the assembly. You use the Constraint tool to create all four types of basic
assembly constraints.

Access

Place Constraint

Panel Bar: Assembly Panel

Shortcut Menu: Constraint
Menu: Insert > Constraint
Keyboard: C

Place Constraint Dialog Box

The Place Constraint dialog box is displayed when you start the Constraint tool.

The following options are available in the Place Constraint dialog box.

Option Dialog Box Access Description

Type Select the type of constraint to create.
Selections As you select features, the selection1 and
selection2 buttons are activated automatically.
If you need to change a selected feature, click
the appropriate selection button and reselect
the geometry. The first selection previews with a
blue highlight or shade while the second
selection previews in a green highlight.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 373

 Option Dialog Box Access Description
Pick Part First This option limits the feature selections to the
selected part. You must first select the part, then
select the feature for the constraint. This option
is usually used in situations where the feature
you are attempting to constrain is obstructed by
other parts in the assembly.
Offset/Angle The label for this field changes depending on
the type of constraint you select. Enter a value
for the offset or angle of the constraint.
Solution Each constraint type offers different solutions.
Preview Constraint This option previews the constraint before
applying. The components move into position,
enabling you to preview the constraint and
confirm or change the constraint settings.
Predict Offset and Only available for Mate and Angle constraints,
Orientation this option inserts the angle or offset value
automatically if the offset field is blank. The
offset or angle value is calculated based upon
the part's current position and is inserted into
the offset/angle field. To override this setting,
enter the offset/angle value manually. This
functionality is useful when applying
constraints without moving the geometry from
its current position.

Mate Constraint

Constraint Description
You use the mate constraint to mate selected geometry. Valid selections
include faces, planes, axes, edges, and points. You can also enter an offset value
to offset the geometry.

Option Dialog Box Description

Access
Mate Selected geometry is mated to each other.

Flush Selected faces are coplanar.

374 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

The following illustrations show examples of using the mate constraint.

Mate Constraint/Mate Solution: Axis/Axis

Mate Constraint/Mate Solution: Face/Face

Mate Constraint/Mate Solution: Point/Point

Mate Constraint/Flush Solution: Face/Face

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 375

 Angle Constraint

Constraint Description
Use the angle constraint to specify an angle between faces, planes, or lines.

Option Dialog Box Description

Access
Directed Angle Using this solution option, the angle is measured by using
the right-hand rule.

Undirected This is the default solution, and it enables either

Angle orientation of the angle constraint. Using this option can
resolve situations in which the component's orientation
flips during a constraint drive or drag.
Explicit This solution option enables you to select a third set of
Reference geometry that is used as a reference by the first two sets of
Vector selected geometry.

Angle Constraint: Face/Face

Explicit Reference Vector Constraint Example

In the following illustration, the position of one cover section is set at an angle relative to the other
section. The Explicit Reference Angle constraint solution was used to ensure the relative position is
maintained even if the first cover section rotates.

376 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Tangent Constraint

Constraint Description
Use the tangent constraint to define a tangency condition between one
circular feature and plane or face, or between two circular features.

Option Dialog Box Description

Access
Inside Creates an inside tangent solution.

Outside Creates an outside tangent solution.

Tangent Constraint/Outside Solution: Circular Face/Circular Face

Insert Constraint

Constraint Description
Use the insert constraint to insert a circular part feature into another circular
part feature. This requires the selection of two circular edges. The center point
of the edge is calculated, and the result is a constraint in which the centerlines
are aligned and the selected edges are made coplanar.

Option Dialog Box Description

Access
Opposed This solution forces the face normals to be opposed.

Aligned This solution aligns the face normals.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 377

 Insert Constraint

Placing Constraints
You apply each assembly constraint to either two components in the assembly or to one component
and one assembly origin feature. When you start the Constraint tool, after you select the type of
constraint, you select one feature on each part to apply it. The geometry that you choose is dependent
upon the type of constraint you apply. The features to which the constraints are applied can be
geometric part features, or work features (work planes, axes, or points) at the assembly or part level.
There are four types of assembly constraints that can be applied between parts: mate, angle, tangent,
and insert. The constraint type chosen depends on the part features and the design intent.
The following illustration shows the cylindrical axes of two parts being constrained together.

Placing Constraints on Obstructed Geometry

When placing constraints on obstructed geometry or features, on the standard toolbar, select the
Hidden Edge Display options to display all edges on the parts.

378 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Process: Placing Constraints
Although each type of constraint creates a different result, the overall process of applying constraints
is the same. The following steps provide an overview of how to place constraints.

1. Open or create an assembly.

2. On the panel bar, click the Constraint tool and select the type of constraint to apply.
3. Select the features to apply the constraints. Depending on the type of constraint and the
geometry chosen, you are given a preview of how the constraint will be applied.

4. If necessary, adjust the Solution option and enter an offset or angle value.
5. Click Apply to create the constraint and keep the Constraint tool active.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 379

 6. Add additional constraints.

Viewing and Editing Constraints

After you create the assembly constraints you can view them in the browser different ways. If you
select a constraint in the browser, it highlights the geometry referenced by the constraint.

Browser View Options

At the top of the browser, you can select a specific browser view option.

380 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Browser: Assembly View
When you create assembly constraints, each part or origin feature is associated with one-half of the
constraint, for example when the browser is in the default position view. Each constraint is listed twice
in the browser.
The following illustration shows how the assembly constraint is displayed under each part to which it
has been applied. If you need to edit, suppress, or delete a constraint, you can access the constraint
under either part.

Browser: Modeling View

If you change the browser view to Modeling View, the constraints are displayed under the Constraints
folder. You can expand the folder to access the constraints. Using this view places all the constraints
in one location. However, it can be difficult to identify constraints on specific parts in larger assemblies.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 381

 Shortcut Menu Options
In the browser, when you right-click a constraint the following shortcut menu is displayed.

Option Description
Edit Select this option to display the Edit Constraint dialog box. You can
completely redefine the assembly constraint.
Drive Constraint Select the option to display the Drive Constraint dialog box and animate
the component through valid constraint conditions.
Modify Select the option to display the Edit Dimension dialog box. Use this
dialog box to edit the constraint offset or angle values.
Suppress Select this option to turn off the constraint. It still remains associated
with the component, but its effect on available degrees of freedom is
turned off.
Find in Window Select this option to zoom the current view to geometry containing the
selected constraint. This helps identify the constraint graphically.
Other Half Select this option to highlight the other half of the constraint, by
expanding the other component to which it has been applied and
highlighting the constraint. This option helps identify which components
the constraint has been applied to.

382 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Procedure: Editing Constraints
The following steps describe how to edit assembly constraints.

1. Locate the constraint in the browser, then right-click the constraint and on the shortcut menu,
click Edit.
2. When you edit a constraint, all edits are done in the same dialog box used to create the
constraint.
■
All options can be changed including the type of constraint.
■
The geometry selected for the first selection highlights in blue (1), while the geometry
selected for the second selection highlights in green (2), as shown in the following
illustration.
■
Make the required edits and click OK.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 383

 Changing the Constraint Offset/Angle Value
You can use two different methods to change the constraint offset/angle value without using the
Edit Constraint dialog box.

Option Description
Using the edit box at the Selecting a constraint causes the edit box to be displayed at the
bottom of the browser bottom of the browser. Enter a new offset/angle value for the
constraint and press ENTER.

Using the Edit Dimension In the browser, right-click the constraint and on the shortcut menu,
dialog box click Modify. In the Edit Dimension dialog box, enter a new offset/
angle value and press ENTER, or click the green check mark.

384 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Procedure: Dragging Constrained Components
The following steps describe how to use constrained dragging components to validate existing
assembly constraints.

1. With the assembly model in its current position, select any of its components.

2. Click and drag the component to validate existing constraints. The components move based
upon the available degrees of freedom.

3. Continue to constrain-drag the components as required.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 385

Proper Constraining Techniques
As you begin to create your assembly designs, you may discover that often there is more than one way
to apply assembly constraints to components and achieve the same or similar results. When applying
constraints, there are some techniques and guidelines that you can use to simplify the process and
apply constraints in a predictable and uniform manner.
■ You should apply the constraints using the simplest approach possible while using constraint
solutions that constrain the parts as completely as required by the design intent.
■
You are not required to fully constrain parts in the assembly, but parts should not be left
unconstrained, or with constraint conditions that do not fully represent the intended function of
the part in the assembly. If a component in an assembly is not intended to be constrained to other
components, then it should be grounded or constrained to assembly-level work features.
■ As you plan the constraints, mimic the real world conditions of the parts in the assembly by using
assembly constraint solutions that most closely resemble how the parts are assembled after
manufacturing. With this approach, you can develop an assembly of parts that interact as
intended with other parts in the assembly.

Example of Proper Constraining Techniques

In the following illustration, you could use a variety of different constraint solutions to assemble these
two components. However, after analyzing how the components are put together, you use the proper
constraint to mimic the real-world process of assembling the two components.

Insert constraint simulates a bolted connection.

Insert constraint simulates a bolted connection.

386 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Exercise: Constrain Components
In this exercise, you use the concepts and techniques
2. To create a Mate-Axis/Axis assembly
learned in this lesson to constrain components in the
constraint:
assembly. After you apply the constraints, you edit
■ On the panel bar, click the Constraint tool.
some constraints to see the effect on the assembly.
■
Select the inside surfaces of the parts as
shown.
■
Click OK to create a Mate-Axis/Axis
constraint and close the dialog box.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 6: Placing,
Creating, and Constraining Components.
Click Exercise: Constrain Components. 3. Constrain-drag the Sleeve-Washer:1
component as shown.

1. Open LCD-Mount-Assembly.iam.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 387

4. To apply a Mate-Face/Face assembly 5. On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate tool
constraint: and rotate the view as shown.
■
On the panel bar, click the Constraint tool
and select the face marked (1). Hover over
the outside face (2) until the Select Other
tool is displayed. You must keep your
cursor on the Select Other tool, or else it
is not displayed.
■
Click the left or right arrow until the inside
face (2) is highlighted. Click the center of
the Select Other tool.
■
Click OK to create the constraint and close
the dialog box.

6. To apply a Tangent assembly constraint:

■
On the panel bar, click the Constraint tool
and click the Tangent type.
■ Select the faces marked (1) and (2) and
make sure that the Outside solution is
selected.
■ Click OK.

7. Press F6 to return to a home view.

388 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

8. Constrain-drag the LCD-Mount-Primary-
Arm:1 component away from the
Arm_Shaft:1 component.

9. On the Standard toolbar, click the Orbit tool 11. Press F6 to return to a home view.
and rotate the view as shown.
12. To apply an Insert assembly constraint:
■ On the panel bar, click the Constraint tool.
■
Click the Insert type and then select the
edges marked (1) and (2), as shown in the
following illustration.
■
Click OK.

10. To use the ALT+Select method of applying

assembly constraints:
■
Press and hold the ALT key.
■
Select the lower face of the LCD_Mount-
Primary-Arm:1 component and drag it to
the circular edge of the Arm_Shaft:1
component as shown.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 389

13. On the panel bar, click the Rotate Component 15. To apply an Angle assembly constraint:
tool. Select the LCS-Mount-Secondary-Arm:1 ■
In the Place Constraint dialog box, select
component and rotate it as shown.
the Angle type and then select the faces
shown.
■
In the Angle field, enter 45 deg.
■
Click OK.

14. To place another Insert assembly constraint:

■ Press C to start the Constraint tool.
■
In the Place Constraint dialog box, select
the Insert type.
■ As shown in the following illustration,
select the edges marked (1) and (2).
■
Click Apply.

16. To edit a constraint value:

■
In the browser, locate and expand the
LCD-Mount-Secondary-Arm:1
component and select the Angle:1
constraint.
■
In the Edit Box, enter 90 and press ENTER.

390 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

17. Switch the browser to Modeling View and
expand the Constraints folder to view the
constraints.

18. Close all files without saving.

Lesson: Constraining Components ■ 391

Lesson: Placing Standard Components Using
the Content Center

Overview
This lesson describes how to use existing content from the Content Center in your assembly designs.
Using parts from the Content Center in your assemblies saves you design time by not having to spend
it modeling standard industry components. Using the supplied standard components also can ensure
that you are using sizes actually available in industry.
In the following illustration, the bearing and machine key were added to the assembly from
predefined content in the Content Center.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■ Describe the purpose and functionalities of the Content Center.
■
Describe the Content Center consumer environment and what Content Center consumers can do.
■
Use the Content Center consumer environment to place, change, and open Content Center
components.
■
Use the Supplier Content Center to access millions of native Autodesk Inventor models of
purchased parts and standard components.

392 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

About the Content Center
The Content Center consists of multiple libraries of content that have been created based on industry
standards. By accessing Content Center content, you save significant time researching possible sizes
and modeling geometry to represent in your design. You can also create your own custom libraries
and publish your own parts or features for reuse by yourself and other team members. When you
publish your library content to the Content Center, everyone can reuse the custom geometry
following the same workflow they follow when reusing supplied industry content.
In the following illustration, multiple categories of part content are listed in the Place from Content
Center dialog box. In this case, a needle roller bearing has been selected for reuse. All of the defined
variations for this part are listed in the family preview pane. By clicking OK, this part is created and
ready for you to use.

The Content Center

The Content Center has two environments for two distinct roles; consumer and editor. In the
consumer environment, you access the libraries and use the parts or features within your design. In
the editor environment, you define the categories and their required parameters within a library,
publish parts or features to these categories, and define the iterations for the parts or features the
consumer can select from when reusing the parts or features.
The libraries you access and publish content to are databases within the Autodesk Data Management
Server. To access content, you must first log in to the Autodesk Data Management Server (ADMS).

Lesson: Placing Standard Components Using the Content Center ■ 393

 In the following illustration, the currently configured libraries are listed in the Autodesk Data
Management Server Console.

About Content Center Consumers

When you place parts or features from the Content Center into an assembly or part design, you are
referred to as a consumer of that content. To replace or resize part content, you again interact with the
Content Center as a consumer. You are also a consumer of the content when you open it from the
Content Center. To be a Content Center consumer, you need to understand the different things you
can do as a consumer.
In the following illustration, the tree view was expanded exposing the Rounded shaft machine key
category. After selecting this category, you can then select different types of rounded shaft machine
keys for reuse in your design.

394 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

 Typical Tasks for Content Center Consumers
Being a Content Center consumer means you can:
■
Directly open the content to save it in your library path or save it somewhere outside your library
path so you can modify it.
■ Place content into an assembly or part as custom or standard content.
■
Edit content added to an assembly or part by changing its size or replacing it with other content.

For content that follows certain authoring and publishing criteria, you have special drag-and-drop
capabilities to size and position the content. This special capability is referred to as AutoDrop. When
you use AutoDrop-enabled components, the correct size is automatically determined by hovering the
cursor over applicable geometry for that content being reused.
In the following illustration, the AutoDrop-configured plain bearing automatically determines the
appropriate OD bearing size based on the highlighted ID edge of the housing about to be selected.
Had an edge to the shaft been selected, the bearing would have been sized based on its ID values.

Using the Content Center Consumer Environment

Because there are different ways of being a consumer of Content Center content, you have different
tools and access methods for those tools. The tools and access methods you use depend on what you
are trying to achieve. To be an efficient Content Center consumer, you need to learn which tools to use
in what situations and how to access them.
In the following illustration, a bearing in an assembly is being changed to a new size.

Lesson: Placing Standard Components Using the Content Center ■ 395

 Content Center Dialog Box
As a Content Center consumer, you interact and select parts or features from the Place from Content
Center dialog box. The following illustration shows the Place from Content Center dialog box with the
optional display of the tree view, favorites, and family preview.

Use the toolbar buttons to navigate, search, and filter through the content. Also change the
display of the icons and which panes are displayed.
When the Tree View button is activated, use this area to navigate and switch to different library
categories.
Use to search for Content Center components.
The Categories and Family Collection pane. It is the main area of the Content Center where you
select which part family or feature family you want to use.
When the Favorites button is active, use to access content you have identified as favorites.
Organize your favorites into groups of favorite content by having the group active prior to
adding the content to favorites.
Use to preview the different family members and their properties for the selected part or
feature selected in area (4).

396 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Configure Libraries in the Project File
To consume content from a library, your active project file must be configured to access the content
in that library.
In the following illustration, the Configure Libraries dialog box is shown listing the libraries currently
configured for a project called Exercises. You can use the content defined only within the libraries
listed in this dialog box. This dialog box is displayed by clicking the Configure Content Center Libraries
button (1) in the Projects dialog box.

Autodesk Data Management Server Login

Before you place content from the Content Center, you must log in to the Autodesk Data Management
Server (ADMS). To log in to ADMS, you click File menu > Autodesk Data Management Server > Log In,
or click the Place from Content Center tool on the panel bar. The Log In dialog box is displayed as
shown in the following illustration.
Select the Content Center Library Read Only User check box (1) to set your login to access only Content
Center libraries and not other Vault data. Select the Automatically Log In Next Session check box
(2) to automatically log in so you do not have to remember to do it.

Lesson: Placing Standard Components Using the Content Center ■ 397

 Placing Content
You have two types of content you can place directly into your designs. You can place parts into an
assembly or you can place features into a part or part sketch. To place parts into an assembly, you use
the Place from Content Center tool. To place features, you use the Place Features tool.
Because some content in the Content Center can be configured with AutoDrop capabilities and other
parts require you to enter in distance values, the procedure for placing parts in an assembly can vary
depending on the type of content you select.
If you double-click a part in the Content Center, regardless of whether it is configured with AutoDrop,
you select and specify the size and other properties within a dialog box. When placing standard
content, like bolts, washers, and bearings, this dialog box also has an option you can select to create
the placed component as a custom part instead of a standard library part. If placing it as a custom part,
you specify a name and location for the part to be created so you can modify it later.
If the part is AutoDrop enabled, click the part once in the Content Center to select it and then click OK
to add it to the assembly. To set the size of the part, hover your cursor over geometry in the assembly
that defines that part. The part automatically changes its size to match the geometry the cursor is
hovering over. For example, when placing a bearing on a shaft, hovering over the different diameters
of the shaft automatically changes the size of bearing to match. The match is dependent on the
required size being already defined as a member of that part family.

Access

Place from Content Center

Panel Bar: Assembly Panel

Shortcut Menu: Place from Content Center
Menu: Insert > Place from Content Center

Access

Place Feature

Panel Bar: Part Features

Panel Bar: 2D Sketch Panel
Shortcut Menu: Place Feature

398 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Procedure: Placing Content
The following steps describe how to place content from the Content Center.

1. Start the tool to place a part or feature from the Content Center.
2. In the Content Center dialog box, navigate to and select the part or feature family.
3. Insert the part or feature member into the active assembly or drawing file.

Changing Content
After placing part content into an assembly, you have different tools to access the Content Center data
to either change the part's size or change the type of part. To make these changes, you use the Change
Size tool or Replace from Content Center tool. For either of these tools to change a part, you must first
select the part prior to accessing the tool. When changing the size, you make your modifications in the
dialog box listing the sizes for the members of that part family. When replacing the part, the Content
Center dialog box is displayed and you make your selection there.
When you place a feature into a part, you modify that feature by changing its parameter values or
using 3D grips to resize or reposition the feature.

Access

Change Size

Shortcut Menu: Change Size

Access

Replace from Content Center

Shortcut Menu: Replace from Content Center

Procedure: Changing Content

The following steps describe how to change part content after placing it in an assembly.

1. In the drawing window or browser, select the part to change.

2. Start the tool to change the part's size or to replace it.
3. Select a new part type or size.

Lesson: Placing Standard Components Using the Content Center ■ 399

 Opening Content
You directly open a part from the Content Center libraries using the Open from Content Center tool.
You do this so you can save the part to a library path for use at a later time, or to save it to a path
outside the library path. To save it outside the library path, perform a Save Copy As operation after
opening the part. After it is saved in a path outside of a library path, you can modify and save the
modifications. These modifications may be for a one-time variation, or to publish the modified part
back to the library. Depending on the library, the part could be published back to the original to
update the content, or it could be added as a new part with new part family members.

Access

Open from Content Center

Menu: File > Open from Content Center

Procedure: Opening Content

The following steps describe how to directly open a library part without placing it in an assembly.

1. Start the Open from Content Center tool.

2. In the Content Center dialog box, navigate to and open the part family.
3. Click Save to save it within the library path. Click Save Copy As to save it to a path outside of
the library.

400 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Using the Supplier Content Center
The Supplier Content Center is an Internet portal that provides you with direct access to millions of
standard components. The components are grouped by manufacturer to enable quick access to
purchased components. With the Supplier Content Center, you have a common location to access
native Autodesk Inventor models of the purchased parts and components you may need in your
assembly.

Access

Supplier Content Center

Menu: Web > Supplier Content Center

Procedure: Accessing the Supplier Content Center

The following steps describe how to access and use the Supplier Content Center.

1. Click Web menu > Supplier Content Center.

2. After reviewing the introduction to the portal, click the PARTsolutions Content Warehouse link.
3. The first time you access the portal, you must create a user account.
■
After creating the account, you are sent an activation e-mail.
■ Use the link in the e-mail to activate the account.
4. After logging in to the account, you can navigate to the required components.
5. After you have identified the components, you can add them to your My Documents area on
the portal.
6. Click the download link to download the components.

Lesson: Placing Standard Components Using the Content Center ■ 401

Exercise: Use Content Center Data
In this exercise, you use content from the Content
Center to add a machine key and bearing to help you
complete a design.

3. Open Content Center.iam.

The completed exercise

Completing the Exercise

To complete the exercise, follow the
steps in this book or in the onscreen
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters
and exercises, click Chapter 6: Placing,
Creating, and Constraining Components.
Click Exercise: Use Content Center Data.

4. Open the Content Center as a consumer of its

1. Check to make sure you are logged in to the content. On the Assembly Panel, click Place
Autodesk Data Management Server. from Content Center.
■
Click File menu > Autodesk Data 5. Create your own Content Center favorites
Management Server > Log In. If this group. In the Place from Content Center
option is gray and not selectable, you are dialog box, on the toolbar, click Favorites.
already logged in.
6. Under Favorites, click the down arrow next to
2. Check to make sure the current project file is Content Center. Click Add New Favorites
configured to access the Inventor ISO library. Group.
■ Click File menu > Projects.
■
Click Configure Content Center
Libraries (1).
■ In the Configure Libraries dialog box,
review the list of libraries to ensure
Inventor ISO is listed (2). Click Add Library
to add the library if it is not listed.
■ Click OK to close the Configure Libraries
dialog box.

402 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

7. In the New Favorites Group dialog box: 11. In the ISO 2491 A dialog box, on the Select
■
tab, select the sizes for the key:
Enter Common Shaft Parts.
■
■
Click OK. The Favorites pane is displayed In the Shaft Diameter column, select
as shown. 12-17.
■ In the Width X Height column, select 5x3.
■
In the Parallel Key Nominal Length
column, select 25.
■
Click OK.
12. In the graphics window, click to add a single
occurrence of this component. Right-click in
the graphics window, and click Done.

8. In the Category View tree, navigate to the

rounded machine keys. Click the Filter button
and make sure ISO is selected.

13. Change the color of the Handle Bearing

Mount to Glass so that you can see the inside
edges of it and the outside edges of the shaft:
■
Select the Handle Bearing Mount:1
component.
■
On the Standard toolbar, in the Select
9. Add the rounded machine key ISO 2491 A Style list, click Glass.
to your favorites group.
■ In the Category and Family Collection
area, right-click ISO 2491 A.
■
Click Add to Favorites. The Favorites pane
for the Common Shaft Parts group is
displayed as shown.

10. Add an occurrence of ISO 2491 A to the

assembly. Under Favorites, double-click
ISO 2491 A.

Lesson: Placing Standard Components Using the Content Center ■ 403

14. Add a plain bearing to the shaft: 17. On the AutoDrop toolbar, click Done.
■
On the Assembly Panel, click Place from
Content Center.
■ Navigate to the Bearings-Plain category
and select ISO 4379 (Cylindrical).
■
Click OK.
15. Size the bearing using the AutoDrop
functionality:
■
Hover the cursor over different cylindrical
edges to see the bearing size
automatically change according to that
geometry, fitting to an inside or outside
surface.
■
18. Change the size of the bearing:
Hover the cursor over the back circular
■ In the graphics window, right-click the
edge of the hole where the shaft slips into
the other part, as shown. bearing. Click Change Size.
■
■
With the green check mark displaying In the ISO 4379 (Cylindrical) dialog box,
next to the cursor, click once. from the list on the Select tab, click
20 x 26 x 20.
■
Click OK.

16. Click and drag the arrow as shown to change

the bearing size. 19. Save and close all files.

404 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly

Overview
This lesson describes basic part design in the context of an assembly.
By creating components in an assembly, you can design parts in the context of the assembly in which
they will reside. You can take advantage of other part features in the assembly to create new geometry
and validate this new geometry based upon the design intent.

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
■ Describe in-place assembly design and state some of its benefits.
■
Describe how design intent can be captured while creating components in an assembly.
■
Create components in an assembly.
■ Edit components in the context of an assembly.
■
State some guidelines for in-place component design.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 405

About Designing and Editing in an Assembly
By designing in the context of the assembly, you can take advantage of other geometry in the
assembly by referencing the features of other parts to assist in the creation of new parts. Commonly
referred to as top-down assembly modeling, this approach allows you to design new parts in the
assembly environment in which they will reside.

Definition of In-Place Design

In-place component design, sometimes referred to as top-down assembly modeling, is a process in
which the individual components in the assembly are designed in the context of the assembly. As new
components are required for the assembly, they are created while working in the assembly.
In the following illustration, a new component is being designed in the context of the assembly. The
other components in the assembly can be used as references for new geometry. As the new
component is created, you can immediately see how the design relates to other components in the
assembly.

New component being designed in the assembly.

Existing component in the assembly.

406 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Example of In-Place Design
In a typical design, the component responsible for connecting the primary and secondary axes of
rotation on a desktop robot must be created. The base component that houses the primary motor and
power supply has already been designed and is being reused from a different assembly. The new
component must mate with the existing base component while adhering to the design parameters
for the new robot. This is accomplished by using the existing base component to start the assembly
and designing the additional components in the context of the assembly.

Benefits to Designing and Editing in an Assembly

The following are some benefits to creating parts in the context of the assembly.
■
Ability to reference other parts in the assembly.
■
Ability to validate function within the assembly.
■ Ability to create adaptive relationships between parts.
■
Presents a better picture of the overall design intent.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 407

Capturing Design Intent
Designing components in the context of the assembly provides opportunities to capture design
intent that might not otherwise be possible, or at minimum be very time consuming or difficult. For
example, perhaps you are designing two components that must mate together. Each of them shares
a common bolt-hole pattern as well as other features such as locator pins and holes that must align.
While it is possible to design each of these components separately, it would be much easier to
accomplish while working in the context of the assembly and referencing the key features on the
other component.
In the following illustration, each matching callout indicates design intent that must be captured from
one component and transferred to the other.

Outside diameters for both components are equal.

Drive pin and hole features must fit together.
Male and female feature diameters must fit together.

Definition of Capturing Design Intent

The definition of capturing design intent can differ depending on the context in which it is being
described. In the context of part design in an assembly, the following list summarizes some examples
of capturing design intent:
■
Duplicating features on mating surfaces from one part to another.
■
Enabling a component's feature to change as a result of changes occurring to mating features of
other components.
■
Using reference geometry on one part to position new geometry on another part.
■
Using the appropriate assembly constraints to mimic real-world conditions and validate the
design of each component with respect to other components in the assembly. How does one
component's form and function affect the form and function of other components in the
assembly?

You can think of capturing design intent as using the tools at your disposal to meet or automate a
given set of design tasks or rules.

408 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

 Example of Design Intent Captured
In the following illustration, design intent is being captured by projecting a cross section of the 3D
Stand-Off component to design the Spacer component. The Spacer component requires a tab feature
that fits in the slot feature of the Stand-Off component. By projecting the cross section of the Stand-
Off component at the sketch plane, you can constrain the new sketch geometry to the cross section,
ensuring a perfect fit.

Creating Components in Place

When you design components in the context of the assembly, you use the Create Component tool to
create the new parts or subassemblies. After the new component is created, the part modeling/sketch
environment is automatically activated. All the tools you would use when doing standard part
modeling are available and the modeling procedures are identical.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 409

 Access

Create Component

Panel Bar: Assembly Panel

Shortcut Menu: Create Component
Toolbar: Assembly Panel
Menu: Insert > Create Component
Keyboard: N

Create In-Place Component Dialog Box

Option Description
New Component Name Enter a file name for the part or subassembly.
Template Select a template to use for the new part or subassembly.
New File Location Enter or browse to the location for the new part or subassembly.
Default BOM Structure Select the way this part or subassembly is represented in the bill of
materials (BOM). Select Normal, Inseparable, Purchased, Phantom, or
Reference.
Virtual Component Use this option to create representational components in the
browser that do not require modeling geometry and do not require
a file.

410 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Procedure: Creating Parts in Place
The following steps describe how to create parts in place.

1. From within an assembly file, click the Create Component tool on the panel bar.
2. Enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. Click OK to create the
new part.

3. Select a face or plane to define the initial sketch plane on the new part.

4. Use the sketching tools available to create new sketch geometry, or project geometry from
other parts in the assembly.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 411

 5. Use part modeling tools to create the 3D geometry.

Procedure: Creating Subassemblies in Place

The following steps describe how to create subassemblies in place.

1. From within an assembly file, click the Create Component tool on the panel bar.
2. Enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. Click OK to create the
new subassembly.

3. Select a face or plane to orient the new subassembly's origin.

412 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

 4. The subassembly is activated automatically. You can now create new parts in the context of
the subassembly or place components that have already been created.

Editing Components in Place

As you design components in the assembly, you are constantly working at a different level of the
assembly. As the design evolves, you may be performing assembly-level edits to constraints or other
properties, then editing specific components in the assembly. To edit a component in the assembly,
you must first activate the component. You can have only one active component in the assembly at
any given time. When a component is active, you can edit only that component.
The following illustration shows an active component in the context of the assembly.

Effect of Activating Components in the Assembly Environment

When a component is activated in the context of the assembly, the assembly environment changes.
■
In the browser, the background behind all other components is gray.
■
In the browser, the component is automatically expanded to expose the component's features.
■
The panel bar switches to display the modeling tools.
■ In the graphics window, the nonactive components are dimmed.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 413

 The following illustration shows the browser when a component is active for in-place editing in an
assembly.

Activating Components in the Assembly

To edit a component in the context of the assembly, you must first activate the part. There are several
options available for activating a component in the context of the assembly.
■
In the browser or graphics window, double-click the part.
■
In the browser or graphics window, right-click the part and on the shortcut menu click Edit.
■ In the browser or graphics window, right-click the part and on the shortcut menu click Open. This
option opens the part in a separate window. Any changes to the part are automatically reflected
in the assembly.

414 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

Guidelines for In-Place Component Design
In-place component design provides you with the most flexible methods and tools to enable you to
focus on your design and capture and implement as much design intent as possible. Some guidelines
can help to ensure your success with this design methodology, while leveraging the functionality of
the application.
■ When you create a new component, the initial sketch of your new component is oriented to the
face or plane you select on existing components or origin work features. Keep this in mind as you
select that face or plane.
■ Use existing geometry as a reference for creating new geometry. This is done by projecting edges
or work features onto the new sketches.
■
If you are projecting associative edges, turn off adaptivity for the component when you no longer
require adaptive functionality.
■
As the component design evolves and features are added, continue to add assembly constraints
as required to simulate real-world assembly conditions.
■ On complex assemblies it may be beneficial to open the component in a separate window. Right-
click the component in the browser or graphics window and click Open.
■
Use the Slice Graphics tool at the sketch level, or assembly section tools at the assembly level to
reveal internal details as required.

Example of In-Place Component Design

In the following illustration, the Slice Graphics tool is being used while sketching to clarify internal
features. In this example, you see how the offset profile compares with the inner profiles of the part.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 415

Exercise: Create Components in an Assembly
In this exercise, you open an assembly and create a
2. To make sure you can project associative
new component using the techniques learned in this
edges:
lesson.
■
On the Tools menu, click Application
Options.
■ In the Options dialog box, click the
Assembly tab and make sure the Enable
Associative Edge/Loop Geometry setting
is selected.
■
Click Close.

3. To create the new component:

The completed exercise
■ On the panel bar, click the Create
Component tool.
■
Completing the Exercise In the Create In-Place Component dialog
To complete the exercise, follow the box, for New Component Name, enter
steps in this book or in the onscreen Design-Robot-Axis1-2.
exercise. In the onscreen list of chapters ■
If necessary, select the Metric\Standard
and exercises, click Chapter 6: Placing, (mm).ipt template. Confirm that the
Creating, and Constraining Components. Constrain Sketch Plane to Selected Face
Click Exercise: Create Components in an
or Plane option is selected. Click OK.
Assembly.

Create a New Component Based on an

Existing Component
In this portion of the exercise, you open an assembly
and create a new component in place based on an
existing component.

1. Open Design-Robot.iam. 4. Select the face on the part as shown.

416 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

5. To project geometry from the existing
component to be used in the new
component:
■
On the panel bar, click the Project
Geometry tool and select the same face
on the existing part.
■
You may need to zoom in to the part to
select the face as shown.

9. To create a new sketch:

■
On the Standard toolbar, click Sketch.
■ Select the top of the component, as
shown.
6. Press ESC to end the command. ■
If the edges of the face are not
7. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit automatically projected onto the sketch,
the sketch. use the Project Geometry tool to project
them.
8. To extrude the profile:
■
On the panel bar, click the Extrude tool
and select the profile you just projected.
■
In the Extrude dialog box, for Distance,
enter 50 mm and ensure that the
extrusion direction is going upward.
■
Click OK.

10. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to exit

the sketch.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 417

11. To extrude the top surface of the component. 1. Open Design-Robot.iam. If your assembly
On the panel bar, click Extrude. does not match the one shown, open
■
Select both the inner and outer profiles. Design-Robot-2.iam.
■ For Distance, enter 5 mm.
■
Select the direction button as shown.
■
Click OK.

2. In the browser, double-click Design-Robot-

Axis1-2. If using Design-Robot-2.iam, double-
click Design-Robot-Axis1-2b.
3. To create a new sketch on the YZ plane:
■
On the Inventor Standard toolbar, click
Sketch.
12. On the Standard toolbar, click Save, to save ■
the new part file. In the browser, expand the Origin folder
of the current part and select YZ Plane.
13. On the Standard toolbar, click Return to
activate the assembly.
14. Save and close the assembly.

Create a New Component

Based on a Sketch
In this portion of the exercise, you open an assembly
and create a new component in place based on a
sketch.
4. To create a plan view of the new sketch:
■
On the Inventor Standard toolbar, click
Look At.
■ In the browser, select Sketch3.

418 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

5. Sketch a circle similar to the one shown. 7. To continue projecting edges:
■ Select the edges as shown in the
following illustration.
■
Press ESC to end the command.

6. To project an axis on the component:

■
On the panel bar, click Project Geometry.
■
In the browser, select the current part's 8. Using standard sketching tools, sketch and
origin Z axis. constrain the geometry as shown. The arcs
should be constrained tangent to the circle
and projected edges.

9. On the Inventor Standard toolbar, click

Return to exit the sketch.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 419

10. Use the Extrude tool to create a midplane 12. To mirror the feature:
extrusion 40 mm thick. ■
On the panel bar, click Mirror.
■
Select the extruded circle.
■ Click the Mirror Plane button and select
YZ Plane in the browser.
■
Click OK.

11. Sketch and extrude a circle 50 mm as shown.

13. On the Standard toolbar, select Beige (Light)

in the Color Style list.

14. On the browser, double-click Design-

Robot.iam to return to the assembly.

420 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components

15. To turn off Adaptivity:
■ In the browser, right-click the Design-
Robot-Axis-1-2:1 component.
■
Click Adaptive to clear the check mark.
16. To apply a Mate-Axis/Axis constraint:
■ On the panel bar, click Constraint.
■
Select the circular surfaces of each
component.
■
Click OK.

17. Close all files without saving.

Lesson: Basic Part Design in an Assembly ■ 421

Chapter Summary

This chapter covered the basics of assembly design, including the tools and workflows for placing and
orienting components, and designing parts in the context of the assembly. With this understanding
of how to create assembly designs, you continue to the next chapter where you learn how to interact
with, analyze, and animate your assembly designs.
Having completed this chapter, you can:
■
Place components in an assembly using the Place Component tool.
■ Place assembly constraints on components in the assembly.
■
Use the Content Center to place standard components into your assembly design.
■
Create new components in the context of the assembly.

422 ■ Chapter 6: Placing, Creating, and Constraining Components